High Performance, Vector Control Inverter

User's Manual

MEHT286
Copyright © 2012 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric
Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
 Preface
This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-VG series of inverters including its operating
procedure, operation modes, and selection of peripheral equipment. Carefully read this manual for proper use.
Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and/or related equipment from operating correctly,
shorten their lives, or cause problems.
The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-VG. Read them in conjunction with
this manual as necessary.

Name Material No. Description

Product scope, features, specifications, external

Catalog MEH659
drawings, and options of the product
Acceptance inspection, mounting & wiring of the
inverter, operation using the keypad, running the motor
Instruction Manual INR-SI47-1580-E for a test, troubleshooting, and maintenance and
inspection

The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.

Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose

Appliances
Our three-phase, 200 V class series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-VG series) were the products of
which were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose
Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999) issued by the Ministry of
Economy, Trade and Industry.
The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004. Since then, the
inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their products.
We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for suppressing harmonics) to your inverter. As a
reactor, select a "DC REACTOR" introduced in this manual. For use of the other reactor, please inquire of us
about detailed specifications.

Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving

High Voltage or Special High Voltage
Refer to this manual, Appendix B for details on this guideline.

i
 How this manual is organized

This manual contains Chapters 1 through 13 and Appendices.

Chapter 1 OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the overview, features and the control system of the FRENIC-VG series and the
recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.

Chapter 2 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, dedicated motor specifications,
and terminal functions for the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the external
dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.

Chapter 3 PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

This chapter describes the operating and storage environments, installation and wiring, typical connection
diagram, names and functions of keypad components, keypad operation, and test run procedure.

Chapter 4 CONTROL AND OPERATION

This chapter provides the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It
also contains overview tables of function codes and details of function codes.

Chapter 5 USING STANDARD RS-485

This chapter describes the use of standard RS-485 communications ports and provides an overview of the
FRENIC-VG Loader.

Chapter 6 CONTROL OPTIONS

This chapter describes the FRENIC-VG's control options.

Chapter 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

This chapter gives application examples of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters.

Chapter 8 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-VG's configuration
with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.

Chapter 9 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It
also helps you select braking resistors and inverter mode (HD, MD, or LD).

Chapter 10 ABOUT MOTORS

This chapter details vector motors that can be connected to the FRENIC-VG series of inverters.

Chapter 11 OPERATION DATA

This chapter provides the characteristics data of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters running.

ii
Chapter 12 REPLACEMENT DATA
When replacing the former inverters (VG, VG3, VG5) with FRENIC-VG, refer to this section.

Chapter 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects
an alarm or a light alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code or the "light alarm"
indication (l-al) is displayed or not, and then proceed to the troubleshooting items.

Appendices

iii
 CONTENTS

Chapter 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Industry-best control performance ..................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System support................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality.......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.5 Global support.................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Features..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Best-in-industry control performance ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2.2 Support for various control methods (multi-drive function) .............................................................. 1-4
1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range ................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1 .................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.5 Extensive network support................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.6 Available inverter support loader ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.7 Extensive built-in functionality.......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality.......................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9 Environmental considerations............................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.10 Simple, interactive keypad ............................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.11 Compliance with overseas standards................................................................................................ 1-11
1.2.12 Compliance with functional safety standards................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.13 Compatibility with legacy models ................................................................................................... 1-11
1.3 Control Methods ..................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1 Control method features and applications........................................................................................ 1-12
1.3.1.1 Open-loop speed control .......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1.2 Closed-loop speed control........................................................................................................ 1-14

Chapter 2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load....................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load.................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Rated current derating........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2 Common Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3 External Dimensions............................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.1 Standard models............................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.2 Keypad ............................................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications.............................................................................................................. 2-28
2.4.1 Induction motor (IM) with speed sensor .......................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed sensor................................................ 2-32
2.5 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................... 2-38
2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions....................................................................................... 2-42
2.6.1 Connection diagrams........................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.6.1.1 Running the MVK type of an induction motor (dedicated motor) ........................................... 2-42
2.6.1.2 Running the GNF2 type of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (dedicated motor)......... 2-44
2.6.2 List of terminal functions................................................................................................................. 2-46

Chapter 3 PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

3.1 Before Use ................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Acceptance inspection (Nameplates and type of inverter) ................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 External view and terminal blocks ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.1 Installation environment .................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Storage environment .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
iv
 3.2.3 Wiring precautions ............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment.......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Noise reduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.6 Leakage current................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.7 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)....................................... 3-12
3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter .......................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Installing the Inverter ....................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.3 Wiring .............................................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.3.3.1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide ................................................ 3-16
3.3.3.2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes.................................................................. 3-17
3.3.3.3 Arrangement of terminals ........................................................................................................ 3-19
3.3.3.4 Wiring precautions ................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3.5 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3.6 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals .................................... 3-27
3.3.3.7 Switching connectors ............................................................................................................... 3-31
3.3.3.8 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals......................................................................... 3-34
3.3.3.9 Setting up the slide switches .................................................................................................... 3-42
3.3.4 Mounting and connecting a keypad ................................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.4.1 Parts required for connection ................................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.2 Mounting procedure ................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.5 USB connectivity ............................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.4 Operation Using the Keypad................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.1 Names and functions of keypad components ................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.2 Overview of operation modes .......................................................................................................... 3-52
3.4.3 Running mode.................................................................................................................................. 3-53
3.4.3.1 Configuring the speed command.............................................................................................. 3-53
3.4.3.2 Running or stopping the motor................................................................................................. 3-54
3.4.3.3 Monitoring the running status on the LED monitor ................................................................. 3-56
3.4.3.4 Jogging (inching) the motor ..................................................................................................... 3-57
3.4.3.5 Monitoring light alarms............................................................................................................ 3-58
3.4.4 Programming mode.......................................................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.4.1 Selecting language -- Menu #0 "LANGUAGE" ...................................................................... 3-66
3.4.4.2 Configuring function codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET"............................................................. 3-67
3.4.4.3 Checking function code data -- Menu #2 "DATA CHECK" .................................................... 3-69
3.4.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "OPR MNTR"....................................................... 3-71
3.4.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O CHECK"............................................................. 3-74
3.4.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" ....................................... 3-77
3.4.4.7 Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR" ................................................................. 3-79
3.4.4.8 Reading alarm information -- Menu #7 "ALM INF" ............................................................... 3-80
3.4.4.9 Viewing causes of alarm -- Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE" ............................................................ 3-83
3.4.4.10 Copying data -- Menu #10 "DATA COPY" ............................................................................. 3-84
3.4.4.11 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #11 "CHANGES" ................................................ 3-86
3.4.4.12 Setting the calendar clock -- Menu #12 "DATE/TIME" .......................................................... 3-87
3.4.4.13 Limiting function codes to be displayed -- Menu #14 "LIMITED FC" ................................... 3-90
3.5 Test Run Procedure................................................................................................................................. 3-91
3.5.1 Checking prior to powering On........................................................................................................ 3-92
3.5.2 Powering ON and checking ............................................................................................................. 3-93
3.5.2.1 Checking the input state of PG (pulse generator) signals......................................................... 3-93
3.5.2.2 Mounting direction of a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals................................................. 3-94
3.5.3 Selecting a desired motor drive control............................................................................................ 3-95
3.5.3.1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor .................................................................................. 3-95
3.5.3.2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor ............................................................................. 3-97
3.5.3.3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor..................... 3-99
3.5.3.4 V/f control for IM .................................................................................................................. 3-101
3.5.4 Running the inverter for operation check....................................................................................... 3-103
3.5.4.1 Test run procedure for induction motor (IM) ......................................................................... 3-103
3.5.4.2 Test run procedure for permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) ............................... 3-104
v
 3.5.5 Selecting a speed command source................................................................................................ 3-106
3.5.5.1 Setting up a speed command from the keypad....................................................................... 3-106
3.5.5.2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer ................................................ 3-106
3.5.5.3 Setting up a speed command with multistep speed selection................................................. 3-107
3.5.6 Selecting a run command source.................................................................................................... 3-108
3.5.6.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad........................................................................... 3-108
3.5.6.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and [REV]) ............ 3-108

Chapter 4 CONTROL AND OPERATION

4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Operation Command .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Speed Command Selection Section ................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Acceleration/deceleration Calculation, Speed Limiting, and Position Control Input Section............ 4-3
4.1.4 Motor Speed/Line Speed Detection ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Pulse Train Command Input Section and Position Detection Section................................................ 4-5
4.1.6 Speed Control and Torque Command Section ................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.7 Torque Limit, Torque Current Command, and Magnetic-flux Command Section............................. 4-7
4.1.8 Current Control and Vector Control Section ...................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.9 PID Calculation Section..................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.10 Load Adaptive Control Section........................................................................................................ 4-10
4.1.11 Motor Temperature Detection Section ............................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.12 Function Selection Digital Input ...................................................................................................... 4-12
4.1.13 Function Selection Digital Output/Fault Output .............................................................................. 4-13
4.1.14 Function Selection Analog Input/Output.......................................................................................... 4-14
4.1.15 Link Command Function Selection ................................................................................................. 4-15
4.1.16 Enabling to Write to/Recording Function Codes ............................................................................. 4-16
4.2 Function Code Tables ............................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.2.1 Function Code Groups and Function Codes .................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code Tables................................................... 4-18
4.2.3 Function Code Tables....................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.2.4 Data Format List .............................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.2.4.1 Data Type 0 to 13 ..................................................................................................................... 4-61
4.2.4.2 Data Type 12 to 145 ................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.3 Details of Function Codes....................................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.1 F codes (Fundamental Functions) .................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.2 E codes (Extension Terminal Functions)........................................................................................ 4-120
4.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) .......................................................................................................... 4-193
4.3.4 P codes (Motor Parameter Functions) ............................................................................................ 4-199
4.3.5 H codes (High Performance Functions) ......................................................................................... 4-214
4.3.6 A codes (Alternative Motor Functions).......................................................................................... 4-266
4.3.7 o codes (Option Functions) ............................................................................................................ 4-269
4.3.8 L codes (Lift Functions)................................................................................................................. 4-277

Chapter 5 USING STANDARD RS-485

5.1 Standard RS-485 Communications Ports.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications.......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Terminal specifications for RS-485 communications ........................................................................ 5-3
5.1.3 Connection method ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.4 Communications support devices ...................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.4.1 Converters .................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.1.4.2 Cables......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5 Link functions .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5.1 Link command permission selection.......................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5.2 Link edit permission selection.................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.5.3 S range option priority ............................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.6 Referencing and changing data .......................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.6.1 Write restrictions for function codes .......................................................................................... 5-9
vi
 5.1.6.2 Negative response and error response ...................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.6.3 No response.............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.1.7 RS-485 function codes ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.1.7.1 Response interval time (H39)................................................................................................... 5-11
5.1.7.2 Disconnection detection time (H38) ........................................................................................ 5-12
5.1.7.3 Character timeouts ................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.7.4 Timeouts on the master side..................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.8 Host side procedures ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.8.1 Read procedure ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.8.2 Write procedure........................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.1.9 RAS.................................................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.1.9.1 Communication errors.............................................................................................................. 5-15
5.1.10 Communication error measures ....................................................................................................... 5-18
5.2 Fuji General-purpose Communications .................................................................................................. 5-19
5.2.1 Message format................................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.2.2 Transmission frame .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.3 Standard frame ................................................................................................................................. 5-20
5.2.4 Option frame .................................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.2.5 Negative response frame .................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.2.6 Field descriptions ............................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.6.1 Data field.................................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.6.2 Sum-check field ....................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7 Communication examples................................................................................................................ 5-29
5.2.7.1 Standard frame ......................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7.2 Option frame ............................................................................................................................ 5-30
5.2.7.3 ASCII code table ...................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.7.4 Program example ..................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3 Modbus RTU .......................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.3.1 Message format................................................................................................................................ 5-33
5.3.2 Transmission frame .......................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.3.2.1 Reading function codes ............................................................................................................ 5-35
5.3.2.2 Writing single function codes................................................................................................... 5-36
5.3.2.3 Writing multiple function codes............................................................................................... 5-37
5.3.2.4 Maintenance code .................................................................................................................... 5-38
5.3.2.5 Error response .......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.3.3 Error checking.................................................................................................................................. 5-40
5.3.3.1 CRC-16 .................................................................................................................................... 5-40
5.3.3.2 CRC-16 algorithm.................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.3.3.3 CRC-16 calculation example ................................................................................................... 5-42
5.3.3.4 Calculating frame length .......................................................................................................... 5-43
5.3.4 Communication examples................................................................................................................ 5-44
5.3.4.1 Reading .................................................................................................................................... 5-44
5.4 FRENIC-VG Loader Overview .............................................................................................................. 5-45
5.4.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 5-45
5.5 Connection.............................................................................................................................................. 5-46
5.5.1 USB connection ............................................................................................................................... 5-46
5.5.1.1 RS-485 connection ................................................................................................................... 5-46
5.5.2 Function overview ........................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.5.2.1 Setting function codes .............................................................................................................. 5-47
5.5.2.2 Trace back ................................................................................................................................ 5-47

Chapter 6 CONTROL OPTIONS

6.1 Common Specifications............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Specifications table ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Inspecting options after delivery........................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2.1 Inspecting options ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.2.2 Operating environment............................................................................................................... 6-4
vii
 6.1.3 Storing options ................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3.1 Temporary storage...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3.2 Long-term storage ...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□) ..................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4.1 Removing the front cover........................................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4.2 Installing a digital 8-bit communications option card................................................................ 6-7
6.1.4.3 Installing a digital 8-bit option card ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.1.4.4 Installing a digital 16-bit option card ....................................................................................... 6-11
6.2 PG Interface Expansion Card.................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.1 Product overview ............................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.2 Model and specifications ................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.2.1 Model ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.3 External dimension diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-18
6.2.4 Basic connection diagram ................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.2.4.1 Terminal connections ............................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.4.2 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.4.3 Speed control............................................................................................................................ 6-21
6.2.4.4 Line speed control.................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.4.5 Pulse train operation and synchronized operation.................................................................... 6-23
6.2.5 Synchronized operation.................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.2.5.1 Synchronized operation system architecture ............................................................................ 6-25
6.2.5.2 Synchronized operation method............................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.5.3 Function codes ......................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.6 Check functions ............................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.2.6.1 Optional equipment check........................................................................................................ 6-34
6.2.6.2 I/O check .................................................................................................................................. 6-34
6.2.7 Protective functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.3 Synchronous Motor Drive PG Interface Card......................................................................................... 6-35
6.3.1 Product overview ............................................................................................................................. 6-35
6.3.2 Model and specifications ................................................................................................................. 6-36
6.3.2.1 Model ....................................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.3.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.3.2.3 Using the card in combination with a Fuji motor..................................................................... 6-38
6.3.3 External dimension diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-39
6.3.4 Basic connection diagram ................................................................................................................ 6-40
6.3.4.1 Line driver type........................................................................................................................ 6-41
6.3.4.2 Open collector output type ....................................................................................................... 6-42
6.3.4.3 Connection Diagram for Fuji servos ........................................................................................ 6-43
6.3.5 Function codes ................................................................................................................................. 6-44
6.3.5.1 Synchronous motor drive PG interface card function codes .................................................... 6-44
6.3.5.2 Motor parameters ..................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.3.6 Check functions ............................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.3.6.1 Optional equipment check........................................................................................................ 6-45
6.3.7 Protective functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.4 T-Link Interface Card ............................................................................................................................. 6-46
6.4.1 Product overview ............................................................................................................................. 6-46
6.4.2 Model and specifications ................................................................................................................. 6-47
6.4.2.1 Inverter type ............................................................................................................................. 6-47
6.4.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-47
6.4.3 External dimensions......................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.4.3.1 Terminal function ..................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.4.4 Basic connection diagram ................................................................................................................ 6-50
6.4.5 Function code................................................................................................................................... 6-52
6.4.6 Protective operation ......................................................................................................................... 6-54
6.4.6.1 Light and heavy alarms ............................................................................................................ 6-54
6.4.6.2 Protective operation function code........................................................................................... 6-55
6.4.7 Data allocation addresses ................................................................................................................. 6-57
viii
 6.4.7.1 Transmission format................................................................................................................. 6-57
6.4.7.2 Occupied area........................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.7.3 Allocated Address .................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.8 Transmission format......................................................................................................................... 6-59
6.4.8.1 Data format (FRENIC-VG ⇒ MICREX) ................................................................................ 6-59
6.4.8.2 Data format (MICREX ⇒ FRENIC-VG) ................................................................................ 6-60
6.4.9 Link function.................................................................................................................................... 6-62
6.4.9.1 Link command permission selection........................................................................................ 6-62
6.4.9.2 Link edit permission selection.................................................................................................. 6-63
6.4.9.3 Data transmission example ...................................................................................................... 6-63
6.5 SX Bus Interface Card ............................................................................................................................ 6-66
6.5.1 Product overview ............................................................................................................................. 6-66
6.5.2 Model and specifications ................................................................................................................. 6-66
6.5.2.1 Inverter type ............................................................................................................................. 6-66
6.5.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-67
6.5.3 External Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 6-69
6.5.4 Basic connection diagram ................................................................................................................ 6-70
6.5.5 Function code................................................................................................................................... 6-73
6.5.5.1 Function code........................................................................................................................... 6-75
6.5.6 Protective operation ......................................................................................................................... 6-79
6.5.6.1 Light and heavy alarms ............................................................................................................ 6-79
6.5.6.2 Protective operation function code........................................................................................... 6-81
6.5.7 Data allocation addresses ................................................................................................................. 6-83
6.5.7.1 Transmission format................................................................................................................. 6-83
6.5.7.2 Area occupied and data allocation addresses ........................................................................... 6-83
6.5.8 Transmission format......................................................................................................................... 6-89
6.5.8.1 Data Format (FRENIC-VG MICREX-SX).......................................................................... 6-89
6.5.8.2 Data format (MICREX-SX FRENIC-VG)........................................................................... 6-95
6.5.9 Link function.................................................................................................................................. 6-103
6.5.10 Data transmission example ............................................................................................................ 6-103
6.5.11 System configuration definition..................................................................................................... 6-106
6.5.11.1 Programming support tool expert (D300win) ........................................................................ 6-106
6.5.11.2 Application program examples .............................................................................................. 6-110
6.5.12 Multiple option application examples ............................................................................................ 6-112
6.5.12.1 Installed with T-Link interface card ....................................................................................... 6-112
6.5.12.2 Installed with high-speed serial communication-capable terminal table................................ 6-113
6.6 High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal Table ............................................................... 6-114
6.6.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-114
6.6.1.1 Multi-winding motor drive..................................................................................................... 6-114
6.6.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.3 External dimensions....................................................................................................................... 6-118
6.6.4 Basic connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 6-119
6.6.4.1 Connecting optical fiber cable................................................................................................ 6-119
6.6.4.2 Basic connection diagram of entire system............................................................................ 6-121
6.6.5 Function code setting ..................................................................................................................... 6-122
6.6.5.1 Number of units setting.......................................................................................................... 6-122
6.6.5.2 Switching multi- and single-motor drive................................................................................ 6-123
6.6.6 Preparation for operation ............................................................................................................... 6-124
6.6.6.1 Operation................................................................................................................................ 6-124
6.6.7 Protective Function ........................................................................................................................ 6-131
6.6.7.1 Inter-inverter link error (erb ).............................................................................................. 6-131
6.6.7.2 Operation procedure error (er6 ) ......................................................................................... 6-132
6.6.7.3 Process in Protective Operation ............................................................................................. 6-132
6.7 CC-Link Interface Card ........................................................................................................................ 6-133
6.7.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-133
6.7.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-134
ix
 6.7.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.7.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.7.3 External dimension drawing .......................................................................................................... 6-138
6.7.4 Basic connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 6-139
6.7.5 Function code................................................................................................................................. 6-140
6.7.5.1 Standard function code........................................................................................................... 6-140
6.7.5.2 Communication dedicated function codes ............................................................................. 6-140
6.7.5.3 Option dedicated function codes ............................................................................................ 6-141
6.7.6 Protection operation ....................................................................................................................... 6-142
6.7.6.1 Light alarm and heavy alarm.................................................................................................. 6-142
6.7.6.2 Protection Operation Function Codes .................................................................................... 6-144
6.7.7 Applicable format list..................................................................................................................... 6-147
6.7.8 VG7 compatible mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0）............................................................. 6-148
6.7.8.1 Remote I/O signal in the VG7 compatible mode ................................................................... 6-148
6.7.8.2 Remote register in VG7 compatible mode (o32=0) ............................................................... 6-150
6.7.8.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=0) in VG7 compatible mode.......................................... 6-151
6.7.9 1 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0） ................................................................................. 6-153
6.7.9.1 Remote I/O signal in 1 X mode (o32=1)................................................................................ 6-153
6.7.9.2 Remote register signal in 1 X mode (o32=1) ......................................................................... 6-155
6.7.9.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=1 to 4)............................................................................ 6-156
6.7.10 2 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=2） ................................................................................. 6-159
6.7.10.1 Remote I/O signal in 2 X mode (o32=2)................................................................................ 6-159
6.7.10.2 Remote register signal in 2 X mode (o32=2) ......................................................................... 6-159
6.7.11 4 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=3） ................................................................................. 6-160
6.7.11.1 Remote I/O signal in 4 X mode (o32=3)................................................................................ 6-160
6.7.11.2 Remote register signal in 4 X mode (o32=3) ......................................................................... 6-160
6.7.12 8 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=4) .................................................................................... 6-162
6.7.12.1 Remote I/O signal in 8 X mode (o32=4)................................................................................ 6-162
6.7.12.2 Remote register signal in 8 X mode (o32=4) ......................................................................... 6-162
6.7.13 Link function.................................................................................................................................. 6-165
6.7.13.1 Link command permission selection...................................................................................... 6-165
6.7.13.2 Link edition permission selection .......................................................................................... 6-166
6.7.14 Setting-up procedure ...................................................................................................................... 6-167
6.7.15 Application program examples ...................................................................................................... 6-167
6.7.15.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................. 6-167
6.7.15.2 Master unit outline ................................................................................................................. 6-167
6.8 17-bit High Resolution ABS Interface Card ......................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-169
6.8.3 External dimension drawing .......................................................................................................... 6-171
6.8.4 Connection ..................................................................................................................................... 6-172
6.8.4.1 Connector and terminal specifications ................................................................................... 6-172
6.8.4.2 Basic connection diagram ...................................................................................................... 6-173
6.8.5 Function code................................................................................................................................. 6-175
6.8.5.1 Function codes related to motor control................................................................................. 6-175
6.8.6 Protective functions........................................................................................................................ 6-178
6.8.6.1 Alarm display list ................................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.6.2 Actions to be taken for alarms................................................................................................ 6-178
6.8.7 Check function ............................................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.7.1 Option mounting check .......................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.8 Related option ................................................................................................................................ 6-179
6.9 F/V Converter (available soon)............................................................................................................. 6-183
6.9.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-183
6.9.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-183
6.9.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-183
6.9.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-184
x
 6.9.3 External dimensions....................................................................................................................... 6-185
6.9.4 Internal block diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-186
6.9.5 Adjustment method ........................................................................................................................ 6-187
6.9.6 Basic connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 6-189
6.10 Synchro Interface (available soon) ....................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-192
6.10.3 External dimension diagram .......................................................................................................... 6-193
6.10.4 Internal block diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-193
6.10.5 Adjustment method ........................................................................................................................ 6-194
6.10.5.1 Description of adjustment locations....................................................................................... 6-194
6.10.5.2 Installing and adjusting the synchro interface ........................................................................ 6-195
6.11 DI Interface Card .................................................................................................................................. 6-196
6.11.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-196
6.11.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-197
6.11.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-197
6.11.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-198
6.11.3 External dimension drawing .......................................................................................................... 6-200
6.11.4 Basic connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 6-201
6.11.5 Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-202
6.11.5.1 Data latch function ................................................................................................................. 6-202
6.11.5.2 Selecting binary or BCD input ............................................................................................... 6-203
6.11.5.3 Controlled variable input........................................................................................................ 6-204
6.11.6 Check functions ............................................................................................................................. 6-206
6.11.6.1 Option installation check........................................................................................................ 6-206
6.11.6.2 I/O check ................................................................................................................................ 6-206
6.12 DIO Expansion Card............................................................................................................................. 6-207
6.12.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-207
6.12.2 Models and specifications .............................................................................................................. 6-208
6.12.2.1 Models.................................................................................................................................... 6-208
6.12.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-209
6.12.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................... 6-212
6.12.4 Basic schematic diagrams .............................................................................................................. 6-213
6.12.4.1 Basic schematic diagram (DIOA) .......................................................................................... 6-213
6.12.4.2 Basic schematic diagram (DIOB) .......................................................................................... 6-214
6.12.5 Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-215
6.12.5.1 DIOA selected ........................................................................................................................ 6-215
6.12.5.2 DIOB selected ........................................................................................................................ 6-217
6.12.6 Check function ............................................................................................................................... 6-218
6.12.6.1 Mounting check on optional cards ......................................................................................... 6-218
6.12.6.2 I/O check ................................................................................................................................ 6-218
6.13 AIO Expansion Card............................................................................................................................. 6-219
6.13.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-219
6.13.2 Models and specifications .............................................................................................................. 6-220
6.13.2.1 Models.................................................................................................................................... 6-220
6.13.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.13.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................... 6-223
6.13.3.1 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-224
6.13.4 Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-225
6.13.5 Check function ............................................................................................................................... 6-226
6.14 Optional PG Changeover Card (available soon)................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-227

xi
 6.14.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................... 6-228
6.14.4 Installation method......................................................................................................................... 6-228
6.14.5 Basic schematic diagram................................................................................................................ 6-229
6.14.6 Operation method........................................................................................................................... 6-231
6.15 E-SX Bus Interface Card ...................................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-233
6.15.3 External dimension drawings......................................................................................................... 6-235
6.15.4 Basic connections........................................................................................................................... 6-236
6.15.5 Related function codes ................................................................................................................... 6-238
6.15.6 Protective operations...................................................................................................................... 6-239
6.15.6.1 Light alarms and heavy alarms in E-SX bus communication (er4 ).................................... 6-239
6.15.6.2 E-SX related alarms (are, arf ) ........................................................................................ 6-242
6.15.6.3 Other inverter alarms.............................................................................................................. 6-242
6.15.7 Data addresses (IQ area) ................................................................................................................ 6-243
6.15.7.1 Supported formats .................................................................................................................. 6-243
6.15.7.2 Input/output data address assignments ................................................................................... 6-243
6.15.8 Format details................................................................................................................................. 6-244
6.15.8.1 I area (MICREX-SX ← FRENIC-VG) .................................................................................. 6-244
6.15.8.2 Q area (MICREX-SX → FRENIC-VG) ................................................................................ 6-246
6.15.9 Data transmission examples........................................................................................................... 6-247
6.15.10 Synchronization of E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control cycle ............................................... 6-249
6.15.10.1 Conditions required for tact synchronization ......................................................................... 6-249
6.15.10.2 Checking the tact synchronization status ............................................................................... 6-249
6.15.10.3 Action when synchronization is lost (are ).......................................................................... 6-249
6.15.11 Support tool interface..................................................................................................................... 6-250
6.15.11.1 Configuration definition method............................................................................................ 6-250
6.15.11.2 Compatible versions of the SPH3000MM and support tool................................................... 6-250

Chapter 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

7.1 Large Crane and Overhead Crane............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Application to Plants................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.3 Servo Press: Large Size for Automobiles, Small Size for Machines such as Crimping Terminal
Processing Machines ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.4 Winding Equipment (Paper and Metal) .................................................................................................... 7-2
7.5 Feeding Part of Semiconductor Manufacturing Device, Wire Saw .......................................................... 7-3
7.6 Test Equipment for Automobiles .............................................................................................................. 7-3
7.7 Shipboard Winch ...................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.8 Flying Shear.............................................................................................................................................. 7-4

Chapter 8 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

8.1 Configuring the FRENIC-VG................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals....................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Recommended Wires ................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4 Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1 Molded case circuit breaker or residual-current-operated protective device/earth leakage circuit
breaker/magnetic contactor .............................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1.1 Functional overview................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers ........................................... 8-20
8.4.2 Surge killer for L-load...................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.3 Arrester ............................................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.4.4 Surge absorber.................................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.4.5 Filter capacitor for radio noise reduction ......................................................................................... 8-28
8.5 Peripheral Equipment Options................................................................................................................ 8-29
xii
 8.5.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units .................................................................................... 8-29
8.5.1.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) ......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.5.1.2 Braking units ............................................................................................................................ 8-29
8.5.1.3 Specifications and connection example ................................................................................... 8-30
8.5.1.4 External dimensions ................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.5.2 Power regenerative PWM converters (RHC series)......................................................................... 8-44
8.5.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 8-44
8.5.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.5.2.3 Function specifications............................................................................................................. 8-47
8.5.2.4 Converter configuration ........................................................................................................... 8-51
8.5.2.5 Basic connection diagrams....................................................................................................... 8-53
8.5.2.6 External dimensions ................................................................................................................. 8-55
8.5.2.7 Generated loss .......................................................................................................................... 8-63
8.5.3 DC reactor (DCR) ............................................................................................................................ 8-65
8.5.4 AC reactor (ACR) ............................................................................................................................ 8-70
8.5.5 Surge suppression unit (SSU) .......................................................................................................... 8-75
8.5.6 Output circuit filter (OFL) ............................................................................................................... 8-76
8.5.7 Radio noise reducing zero phase reactor (ACL) .............................................................................. 8-80
8.5.8 External cooling attachment............................................................................................................. 8-81
8.6 Battery .................................................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.6.1 Overview of battery ......................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.6.2 Installing battery .............................................................................................................................. 8-84
8.6.2.1 Installing battery (for 22 kW or lower) .................................................................................... 8-84
8.6.2.2 Installing battery (for 30 kW or higher) ................................................................................... 8-85
8.6.3 Replacing battery ............................................................................................................................. 8-86
8.6.4 Sending battery via air transport ...................................................................................................... 8-86

Chapter 9 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

9.1 Selecting Motor and Inverter Capacities................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics.................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.3 Equations for selections ..................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ............................................................................... 9-7
9.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation.......................................................................... 9-9
9.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor.............................................................................. 9-14
9.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor ................................................................................. 9-15
9.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.2.1 Selection procedure.......................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................ 9-16
9.3 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (HD/MD/LD) ................................................................................... 9-17
9.3.1 Precaution in making the selection .................................................................................................. 9-17
9.3.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity................................................................ 9-18

Chapter 10 ABOUT MOTORS

10.1 Vibration and Noise ................................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Acceleration Vibration Value .................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.3 Allowable Radial Load at Motor Shaft Extension .................................................................................. 10-3
10.4 Allowable Thrust Load ........................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.5 List of Special Combinations.................................................................................................................. 10-6
10.5.1 Combination list of 380V series....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.2 Combination list of low base speed series ....................................................................................... 10-7

Chapter 11 OPERATION DATA

11.1 Frequency Response Characteristics....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Rotational Fluctuation Measurement Sample ......................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Current Distortion Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 11-2
xiii
11.4 Torque Ripple ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.5 Impact Load Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.6 Speed-torque Characteristics (Vector control with speed sensor) ........................................................... 11-3
11.7 Torque Control Accuracy (Vector control with speed sensor) ................................................................ 11-4
11.8 Deceleration/Acceleration via Zero Speed (Vector control with speed sensor) ..................................... 11-4

Chapter 12 REPLACEMENT DATA

12.1 Classification of Replacement ................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 External Dimensions Comparison .......................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 Replacing VG7S .............................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.2 Replacing VG5S .............................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.2.3 Replacing VG3................................................................................................................................. 12-5
12.3 Terminal Size .......................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.1 Replacing VG7S .............................................................................................................................. 12-6
12.3.2 Replacing VG5S .............................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.3.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4 Terminal Symbol .................................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-12
12.4.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.4.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-16
12.5 Function Codes ..................................................................................................................................... 12-19
12.5.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-19
12.5.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-20
12.5.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-25
12.6 Motor Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 12-30
12.6.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-30
12.6.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-33
12.6.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.7 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................. 12-37
12.7.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-37
12.7.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-38
12.7.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-39
12.8 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 12-40
12.8.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-40
12.8.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-41
12.8.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-42

Chapter 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
13.1 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 13-2
13.3 If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor ........................................................................................ 13-3
13.3.1 List of alarm codes........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.3.2 Possible causes of alarms, checks and measures.............................................................................. 13-5
13.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor............................................... 13-26
13.5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor........ 13-27
13.5.1 Abnormal motor operation............................................................................................................. 13-27
13.5.2 Problems with inverter settings...................................................................................................... 13-38

Appendices
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)................................................................... A-1
A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices ....................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Noise...................................................................................................................................................... A-2
A.3 Noise prevention.................................................................................................................................... A-4
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special
High Voltage ........................................................................................................................................ A-12
xiv
 B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters............................................................................................. A-12
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or special high
voltage ................................................................................................................................................. A-13
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters.......................... A-18
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ............................................................................................ A-18
C.2 Effect of surge voltages ....................................................................................................................... A-19
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages ............................................................................................. A-19
C.4 Regarding existing equipment ............................................................................................................. A-20
App. D Inverter Generating Loss ..................................................................................................................... A-21
App. E Conversion from SI Units.................................................................................................................... A-23
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ................................................................................................. A-25

xv
Safety precautions
Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or
maintenance and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with
all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries
and/or substantial property damage.

Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences.
These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.

Application

• The FRENIC-VG is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor. Do not use it for single-phase motors or for other
purposes.
Fire or an accident could occur.
• The FRENIC-VG may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety.
• Though the FRENIC-VG is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it.
An accident could occur.

Installation

• Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Do not place flammable object nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
• Inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above, whose protective structure is IP00, involve a possibility that a human body
may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block. Inverters to which an optional DC reactor is connected
also involve the same. Install such inverters in an inaccessible place.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.

• Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation.

Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from
accumulating on the heat sink.
• When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases, use only the specified screws.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident might result.
• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.

xvi
Wiring

• If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in the upstream
power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to factory operation, install
a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) individually to inverters to
break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection)
in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters. Use the recommended devices within the recommended current
capacity.
• Use wires in the specified size.
• Tighten terminals with specified torque.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of
handling their wirings together.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause a fire.
• Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA
and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
• Be sure to ground the inverter's grounding terminals G.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage
of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
• When connecting a DC braking resistor (DBR), never connect it to terminals other than terminals P(+) and DB.
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
• In general, sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e., reinforced
insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main
circuit, the insulation of the sheath might break down, which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main
circuit. Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit.
Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock.

• Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate, turn OFF the power and wait at
least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters with a
capacity of 30 kW or above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure,
using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has
dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.

• The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices.
To prevent them from malfunctioning, implement noise control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.

xvii
Operation

• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• If the auto-reset function has been selected, the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the
cause of tripping. Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at the time of restarting.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
• If the stall prevention function (torque limiter) has been selected, the inverter may operate with
acceleration/deceleration or speed different from the commanded ones. Design the machine so that safety is ensured
even in such cases.
• The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 (= 0, 2 or 3).
When the keypad operation is disabled, prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations. Switching the
run command source from keypad (local) to external equipment (remote) by turning ON the "Enable communications
link" command LE disables the key.
To enable the key for an emergency stop, select the STOP key priority with function code H96 (= 1 or 3).
• If any of the protective functions have been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that the all run
commands are set to OFF, release the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON, the inverter
may supply the power to the motor, running the motor.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
• If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 3 to 5), then the inverter
automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered.
Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
• If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the
FRENIC-VG User's Manual, the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
An accident or injuries could occur.
• Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1/R,
L2/S and L3/T, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
• Even if the run command is set to OFF, voltage is output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W if the servo-lock
command is ON.
• Even if the motor is stopped due to DC braking or preliminary excitation, voltage is output to inverter output terminals
U, V, and W.
An electric shock may occur.
• The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting, carefully check the
specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Otherwise, injuries could occur.

• Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
• The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
• Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings.
Run commands (e.g., "Run forward" FWD), stop commands (e.g., "Coast to a stop" BX), and speed change commands
can be assigned to digital input terminals. Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals, modifying the
function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed.
• When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals, switching run or speed command sources with the related
terminal commands (e.g., SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8, N2/N1, KP/PID, IVS, and LE) may cause a sudden motor start or an
abrupt change in speed.
An accident or injuries could occur.

xviii
Maintenance and inspection, and parts replacement

• Before proceeding to the maintenance/inspection jobs, turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for
inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or
above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a
similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has dropped to the safe level (+25
VDC or below).
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Never modify the inverter.
Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries.

Disposal

• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

Otherwise injuries could occur.

Speed control mode

• If the control parameters of the automatic speed regulator (ASR) are not appropriately configured under speed control,
even turning the run command OFF may not decelerate the motor due to hunting caused by high gain setting.
Accordingly, the inverter may not reach the stop conditions so that it may continue running.
Even if the inverter starts deceleration, the detected speed deviates from the zero speed area before the zero speed
control duration (F39) elapses due to hunting caused by high response in low speed operation. Accordingly, the inverter
will not reach the stop conditions so that it enters the deceleration mode again and continues running.
If any of the above problems occurs, adjust the ASR control parameters to appropriate values and use the speed
mismatch alarm function in order to alarm-trip the inverter, switch the control parameters by speed, or judge the
detection of a stop speed by commanded values when the actual speed deviates from the commanded one.
An accident or injuries could occur.

Torque control mode

• When the motor is rotated by load-side torque exceeding the torque command under torque control, turning the run
command OFF may not bring the stop conditions so that the inverter may continue running.
To shut down the inverter output, switch from torque control to speed control and apply a decelerate-to-stop or
coast-to-stop command.
An accident or injuries could occur.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts. Restore the
covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation.

xix
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to
full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can
result in accidents.

This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.

This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.

xx
 FRENIC- VG
1
Chapter 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the overview, features and the control system of the FRENIC-VG series and the
recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.

Contents

1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 Industry-best control performance .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 System support ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges ........................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.5 Global support............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Best-in-industry control performance.......................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Support for various control methods (multi-drive function) ....................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range ......................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1 ........................................................................... 1-4
1.2.5 Extensive network support .......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.6 Available inverter support loader ................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.7 Extensive built-in functionality ................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality ................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9 Environmental considerations ..................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.10 Simple, interactive keypad ........................................................................................................ 1-10
1.2.11 Compliance with overseas standards......................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.12 Compliance with functional safety standards............................................................................ 1-11
1.2.13 Compatibility with legacy models............................................................................................. 1-11
1.3 Control Methods ............................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1 Control method features and applications ................................................................................. 1-12
1.3.1.1 Open-loop speed control .......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1.2 Closed-loop speed control........................................................................................................ 1-14
 1.1 Overview

1.1 Overview

Chap. 1
1.1.1 Industry-best control performance

OVERVIEW
z The FRENIC-VG implements vector control with a speed sensor (induction and synchronous
motors), vector control without a speed sensor (induction and synchronous motors*1), V/f control
(induction motors), and multi-drive functionality.
z Vector control with a speed sensor (for FRENIC-VG induction motors) delivers best-in-industry
performance with a speed response of 600 Hz, current response of 2,000 Hz, speed control
accuracy of ±0.005%, and torque control accuracy of ±3%.
*1 Available soon.

1.1.2 System support

z The FRENIC-VG ships standard with RS-485 communications functionality and optional support
for T-Link, SX bus, and CC-Link interfaces.
z The UPAC optional card with user program functionality allows users to configure and develop
proprietary systems, and dedicated package software is also available*1.
z The FRENIC-VG Loader, which offers extensive functionality including traceback and real-time
trace capability, supports Windows XP, Vista, and 7.
*1 Available soon.

1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality

z Extensive auto-tuning function for optimal control of all types of motors
z Built-in load oscillation suppression observer function and load compensation control function
z Extensive position control functionality, including zero-speed lock control
z Optional position synchronization control using pulse train input
z Optional orientation control*1
*1 Available soon.

1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges

z A single set of specifications supports a broad range of capacities—from 0.75 kW to 90 kW for
200 V circuits and 3.7 kW to 630 kW for 400 V circuits—simplifying the system development
process.

z Three sets of ratings are supported by HD mode (constant-torque), which offers an overload
rating of 150% for 1 min. and 200% for 3 sec.; LD mode (square deceleration torque), which
supports motors with rated currents one step larger than the inverter and offers an overload rating
of 120% for 1 min.; and MD mode, which supports motors with rated currents one step larger
than the inverter while limiting the inverter’s internal switching frequency and offers an overload
rating of 150% for 1 min.

1-1
1.1.5 Global support
z The standard model complies with UL/cUL*1 standards, CE Mark*1 requirements, and the RoHS
Directive, making it possible to standardize equipment and machinery specifications both inside
and outside Japan.

z The FRENIC-VG complies with the EN 61800-5-2 functional safety standard in its standard
configuration*1.

z The OPC-VG1-SAFE functional safety option allows safety functionality to be expanded.

z The keypad offers standard support for eight languages*1, ensuring peace of mind when
exporting devices or machinery that use the inverter.

z Optional support is available for various open networks.

*1 Available soon.

1-2
 1.2 Features

1.2 Features

Chap. 1
The FRENIC-VG is a high-performance vector control inverter that provides a high degree of
freedom in adjusting speed and torque.

OVERVIEW
1.2.1 Best-in-industry control performance
z Speed response of 600 Hz (6× Fuji’s previous VG7 model when using vector control with a
speed sensor)

z Current response of 2,000 Hz (2× Fuji’s previous VG7 model when using vector control with a
speed sensor)

z Torque control accuracy (linear) of ±3% and speed control accuracy of ±0.005%

Speed response of 600 Hz Tracking characteristics with impact load

Reduction of rotational unevenness to 1/3 Speed and torque characteristics

1-3
1.2.2 Support for various control methods (multi-drive function)
z Supports vector control with a speed sensor, vector control without a speed sensor, and V/f
control for induction motors.
z Supports vector control with a speed sensor (requires optional card) and vector control without a
speed sensor*1 for synchronous motors.
*1 Available soon.

1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range

z A single model supports a broad range of capacities from 0.75 kW to 630 kW, simplifying the
system development process.
z The standard model supports three modes.
The operating mode is switched based on the motor’s load conditions. In medium-duty (MD) and
low-duty (LD) applications, the FRENIC-VG can drive motors one to two steps larger than the
inverter.
Mode Applied load Characteristics Applied overload rating
Current 150% for 1 min. / 200% for
HD High duty (standard) Powerful, low noise
3 sec.
Can drive a motor one step larger than Current 150% for 1 min., carrier 2
MD Medium duty
the inverter*1. to 4 kHz*2
Can drive a motor 1 to 2 steps larger
LD Low duty Current 120% for 1 min.
than the inverter*1.
*1 Varies with motor specifications and supply voltage.
*2 Produces a higher level of noise. Verify suitability of environment in which motor will be installed.

1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1

z The optional UPAC (User Programmable Application Card), which provides user program
functionality, allows certain aspects of inverter control and terminal functionality to be changed,
making it possible for users to configure and develop proprietary systems.
z Dedicated package software is also available for functionality such as tension control, dancer
control, and position control.
*1 Available soon.

UPAC system
Computer
Inverter link (optical communications) period as low as 2 ms Inverter support loader
when using optical transmission UPAC support loader
(equivalent to D300Win)
RS-485/RS-232C converter

RS-485 (38.4 kbps)

UPAC installed on FRENIC-VG master device only

Inverter link option installed on all devices

Dedicated FRENIC-VG motor or

general-purpose motor

1-4
 1.2 Features

1.2.5 Extensive network support

Chap. 1
z The FRENIC-VG ships standard with RS-485 communications functionality and optional support
for T-Link, SX bus, and CC-Link interfaces.

OVERVIEW
z It also supports various open buses (PROFIBUS-DP, etc.)*1.

*1 Available soon.

RS-485 systems
A standard RS-485 terminal is provided as a control circuit terminal, making it simple to implement
multi-drop connections.

T-Link systems

MICREX-SX with T-Link module

Computer

T-Link (500 kbps)

RS-485 (38.4 kbps) RS-485/RS-232C

converter

FRENIC-VG with
T-Link option Use the dedicated SX bus option to
enable connections to an SX bus.
Use the dedicated field bus option to
enable connections to various open
buses (PROFIBUS-DP, etc.).
Dedicated FRENIC-VG motor
or general-purpose motor

1.2.6 Available inverter support loader

z An available inverter support loader (option) with Windows support simplifies the process of
setting function codes.

After being connected to a

computer via the standard
built-in USB interface, the
FRENIC-VG loader allows
function codes to be set.

The loader operates on

Windows XP, Vista, and 7 and
adds operation monitor,
real-time trace, historical
trace, and trace back
functionality.

1-5
1.2.7 Extensive built-in functionality
z Extensive auto-tuning functionality
The motor constant can be tuned while the motor is in the stopped state.
An online tuning function allows motor parameters to be revised while the motor continues to
operate.

z Built-in observer function for suppressing load oscillation

z Load compensation control function

Enables continuous speed control during low-duty operation.

z Extensive position control functionality

‚ Zero-speed lock control
‚ Optional position synchronization control using pulse train input
‚ Optional orientation control*1

z Built-in braking unit

The FRENIC-VG incorporates a built-in braking unit for use with capacities of 55 kW or less
(for 200 V circuits) or 160 kW or less (for 400 V circuits), allowing a braking resistor to be
connected directly to the FRENIC-VG unit. This feature helps make machinery and devices
using the inverter more compact.

z Total of 23 I/O contacts

Input Output
Analog 3 contacts 3 contacts
Digital 11 contacts 6 contacts

z PG feedback interface
‚ Standard built-in complementary PG interface (12 V, 15 V)
‚ Optional line driver and resolver*1 support
‚ Optional support for 4-bit signals, UVW, Z-phase, and EnDat*1 as magnetic position signals
for driving synchronous motors
*1 Available soon.

1-6
 1.2 Features

1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality

Chap. 1
z A traceback function automatically records operating state data (traceback data) such as the speed,
torque, current, and voltage immediately prior to a trip stop inside the inverter. The FRENIC-VG
Loader can be used to capture traceback data and display the operating state immediately prior to

OVERVIEW
a trip stop in chart form, making it easier to search for the causes of such events.

z A calendar and clock function records the time and date of trip stops, making it easier to search
for the causes of such events.

z The inverter’s operating state at the time of the most recent and three previous trip stops is stored
and can be monitored on the keypad.

z By setting a specific alarm as a light failure target in advance, it is possible to display data on the
keypad and generate “do” output without initiating a trip stop event.

z A psuedo-failure can be triggered by either keypad operation or the FRENIC-VG Loader. This
capability can be used to check the trip stop sequence.

z I/O terminal check function

z Main circuit capacitor service life detection

z Inverter load rate measurement

z Recording and display of cumulative run time

z Display of operating state data such as output voltage, cooler temperature, and torque command
value

z Configuration of the electronic thermal time constant, allowing the inverter to support a variety
of motors

z The design life of various consumable parts inside the inverter has been extended to 10 years,
which has allowed equipment maintenance cycles to be extended.

Consumable part Design life

Cooling fan 10 years
Main circuit capacitor 10 years
Electrolytic capacitor on PCB 10 years
Fuse (90 kW or above) 10 years
Calendar/clock backup battery 5 years

Service life figures are based on the following conditions:

- Ambient temperature: 40°C
- Load factor: 100% (HD mode), 80% (MD/LD mode)
*Design life figures are calculated values and are not intended to serve as a guarantee of hardware
performance.

1-7
 z Extensive service life warnings
The inverter provides functionality designed to facilitate machinery maintenance.

Item Purpose
Cumulative run time (unit: 1 hour) Displays the total run time for the inverter.
The amount of time during which the main power supply is supplied
is indicated as a whole number of hours.
Cumulative motor run time (unit: 10 Displays the total run time for the motor.
hours) This figure is used to determine the service life of the machinery
(load).
Cumulative startup count Displays the number of motor startups.
This figure can be used as a guide for timing the replacement of
machinery parts (such as timing belts) that are placed under load
during normal operation.
Equipment maintenance warning The inverter can output a warning signal when the set value is
Cumulative motor run time (unit: 10 reached.
hours) This functionality makes it possible to manage the motor’s
Cumulative startup count cumulative run time and number of startups, which are useful in
planning maintenance.
Display of inverter service life alarm Displays the following:
x Current capacitance of DC link bus capacitor
x Total run time of the cooling fan (with on/off compensation)
x Total run time of the electrolytic capacitor on the PCB

1.2.9 Environmental considerations

z Enhanced environmental resistance
The inverter offers improved resistance to harsh operating environments compared to
conventional inverter models.
(1) Enhanced environmental resistance of the cooling fan
(2) Adoption of nickel and tin plating for copper bars

While the FRENIC-VG offers improved resistance to harsh operating environments compared to
conventional models, special consideration concerning the operating environment is necessary in
the following cases:

a. Environments where sulfide gas is present (some applications in tire manufacturing, paper
manufacturing, sewage treatment, and fiber manufacturing)
b. Environments where conductive dust or foreign matter is present (metalworking, extruding
machine or printing press operation, waste disposal, etc.)
c. Other: Where the inverter would be used in an environment that differs from the standard
specifications

If you are considering using the inverter under any of the above conditions, please contact Fuji in
advance.

1-8
 1.2 Features

z Protection against micro-surges (optional)

Chap. 1
SSU surge suppression units (optional)
If the motor drive cable is too long, a very low surge voltage (micro-surge) may be generated at
the motor connection ends. This surge voltage can cause deterioration of the motor, dielectric

OVERVIEW
breakdown, and increased noise. A surge suppression unit can be used to suppress this surge
voltage.

(1) Simply connecting a surge suppression unit to the motor dramatically reduces the surge
voltage.
(2) Since no additional work is required, the units can be easily installed on existing equipment.
(3) The units can be used with motors with a capacity of 75 kW or less.
(4) The units require no power source or maintenance.
(5) Two types are available: one for 50 m motor cable and the other for 100 m motor cable.
(6) The units comply with environmental and safety standards (including the RoHS Directive).

z Compliance with the RoHS Directive

The FRENIC-VG complies with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive in its
standard configuration. It is an environmentally friendly inverter as use of the following six
hazardous substances has been restricted.
Six hazardous substances
Lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs), and
polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE)
*Except certain parts on some models.
About the RoHS Directive
Directive 2002/96/EC, promulgated by the European Parliament and European Council, limits
the use of specific hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices.

1-9
1.2.10 Simple, interactive keypad
z A large, easy-to-read LED consisting of five 7-segment digits allows users to visually check
monitor values with ease.

z A backlit dot matrix LCD allows users to set function codes and monitor multiple data points at
the same time while displaying guidance.

z Standard copy function

Function code data can be easily copied to another FRENIC-VG unit.

z Out-of-the-box remote operation

Simply connect the inverter and keypad with a 10Base-T LAN cable to enable remote operation
(at distances of up to 20 m).

z Standard support for eight languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Chinese, and Korean)*1
*1 German, French, Italian, and Spanish: Available soon.

z JOG (jogging) operation is possible with keypad key or terminal block input.

z A help key displays guidance on device operation.

z The calendar and clock function can display the time and date.

1-10
 1.2 Features

1.2.11 Compliance with overseas standards

Chap. 1
z The FRENIC-VG complies with the following
overseas standards in its standard configuration,
allowing standardization of device and machinery

OVERVIEW
specifications in Japan and overseas:
EC directives: Low Voltage Directive*1, RoHS Directive,
Machinery Directive*1, UL standards, cUL standards*1
z The unit also complies with the EMC Directive when the standard model is combined with an
optional component (EMC filter)*1.
*1 Available soon.

1.2.12 Compliance with functional safety standards

z The FRENIC-VG incorporates an STO safety function that complies with the EN 61800-5-2
functional safety standard in its standard configuration*1.

z With the OPC-VG1-SAFE functional safety option, the unit provides STO, SS1, SLS, and SBC
safety functions that comply with the EN 61800-5-2 functional safety standard*1.

STO safety function: Safe torque off

Functionality for immediately turning motor torque off (by interrupting output).
SS1 safety function: Safe stop 1
Functionality for decelerating the motor and immediately turning motor torque off with the STO
function (by interrupting output) when a specified speed is reached or a specified time has
elapsed.
SLS safety function: Safely limited speed
Functionality for ensuring that the motor speed does not exceed a specified speed.
SBC safety function: Safe brake control
Functionality for outputting a signal to control motor braking
*1: Available soon.

1.2.13 Compatibility with legacy models

The FRENIC-VG is compatible with previous Fuji vector control inverters, making it easy to update
to the FRENIC-VG.
z Compatibility with the FRENIC5000VG5S*1
By changing FRENIC-VG VG5-compatible models to VG5 compatibility mode, the FRENIC-VG
can be configured with VG5 function code without any need to change function code numbers or
data definitions. A compatible adapter is available to allow mounting of the unit.
*1: Available soon.

z Compatibility with the FRENIC5000VG7S

Since the FRENIC-VG’s function codes are compatible with the VG7’s function codes, the
FRENIC-VG can be configured with VG7 function codes without modification (except M3
function codes). Additionally, function codes can be captured from a VG7 unit with the
FRENIC-VG Loader and copied to the FRENIC-VG without modification.

1-11
1.3 Control Methods
1.3.1 Control method features and applications
Inverter-based devices for varying AC motor speed are most commonly used to control the rotational
speed of a load. This section describes the basic architecture of various speed control methods, their
characteristics, and important information to consider when using them in various applications.
Speaking broadly, speed control systems can be classified as either open-loop or closed-loop control
systems (see Figure 1.3.1).

Speed Control Open-loop control V/f control

Slip compensation control

Closed-loop control Slip frequency control

Vector control

Vector control without

speed sensor

Figure 1.3.1 Classification of Speed Control Methods

1.3.1.1 Open-loop speed control

Main circuit
Converter Inverter

+ M
3-

Control circuit |V*|: Voltage command

f*: Frequency command

Acceleration/ |V*|
deceleration V/f
computational 3-phase
unit pattern voltage
command
PWM
f* calculation
Frequency
setting

Figure 1.3.2 Open-loop Speed Control: Basic Architecture

1-12
 1.3 Control Methods

As is illustrated in Figure 1.3.2, “Open-loop

Chap. 1
f f f 1
f f f 6 5 4 3 2

Speed Control: Basic Architecture,” this approach

attempts to control the load’s rotational speed by
Load

Torque
means of the frequency of inverter output, without torque

OVERVIEW
generating feedback in the form of speed
information for the control target. As shown in
Figure 1.3.3, induction motors’ speed versus
torque characteristics are characterized by a slight
0 N N N N N N 6 5 4 3 2 1

slope across frequencies f1 to f6. If the frequency Speed

of the voltage supplied to the motor remains
Figure 1.3.3 Speed Versus Torque
constant, then there is little variation in rotational Characteristics
speed in response to variations in load; for
example, slip at the rated torque is on the order of several percent. In other words, when controlling
the motor’s speed by changing the inverter’s output frequency, V/f control, which controls the ratio
between the motor’s terminal voltage and the applied frequency, is generally used.

Since open-loop control does not require a speed sensor, it is primarily used by general-purpose
inverters in applications where fast response is not particularly important, for example to enable
variable-speed operation of existing motors or with squared-deceleration torque loads such as fans or
pumps.

Main circuit
Converter Inverter

+ M
3-

Control circuit
Acceleration/ + |V*|
deceleration V/f |V*|: Voltage command
computational 3-phase f*: Frequency command
unit + pattern voltage t : Torque calculated value
command PWM v: Detected voltage value
ωｓｌ f* i: Detected current value
Frequency calculation ωｓｌ: Amount of slip
compensation
setting K
v
t Torque
calculation i

Figure 1.3.4 Speed Control Using the Slip Compensation Method

Factors determining the accuracy of the rotational speed in open-loop speed control include load
torque fluctuations, accuracy of the output frequency, and supply voltage fluctuations. The slip
compensation control method addresses load torque fluctuations by calculating the output torque
from the motor’s terminal voltage and primary current and compensating the inverter’s output
frequency accordingly in an attempt to maintain a constant rotational speed, as illustrated in Figure
1.3.4.

1-13
1.3.1.2 Closed-loop speed control
Closed-loop speed control compensates for speed fluctuations by generating feedback in the form of
speed information.
Since highly accurate speed control is possible by generating feedback in the form of the control
target’s rotational speed, closed-loop speed control can be used in applications such as paper
machines and machine tools.

Main circuit
Converter Inverter

Speed
detector
+ M
PG
3-

Control circuit
N* : Speed command
value
N* + Speed Torque N: Detected speed value

- control control
N
Speed
setting

Figure 1.3.5 Closed-loop Speed Control: Basic Architecture

Figure 1.3.5 illustrates the basic architecture of the closed-loop speed control method. Speed
information from a speed detection sensor such as a pulse generator (PG) is fed back to the system
and compared to the speed command, and the inverter’s output frequency is controlled so that the
speed command and the detected speed value match.
Speed control methods include slip frequency control, vector control with a speed sensor, and vector
control without a speed sensor. An overview of each of these control methods follows.
The FRENIC-VG series of high-performance vector control inverters uses closed-loop vector control
to implement speed control.

1-14
 1.3 Control Methods

(a) Slip frequency control

Chap. 1
Main circuit
Converter Inverter

OVERVIEW
Speed
detector
+ M
PG
3-

N* : Speed command value

Control circuit N : Detected speed value
iT* : Torque current
iT* command value
＋ Current
iM* : Excitation current
Ｎ＊
Vector calculation

command value
controller iT : Detected torque current

Vector
rotator
＋ Speed － value
PWM iM : Detected excitation
－ controller iM * current value
＋ Current
Ｎ controller
i: Motor current
(instantaneous value)
－
Speed
setting
iM
Vector
rotator
i
iT

Figure 1.3.6 Slip Frequency Control Architecture

Figure 1.3.6 illustrates the architecture of the slip frequency control method. Output from the speed
controller becomes the slip frequency based on the torque, and the inverter compensates for speed
fluctuations by adding the slip frequency to the actual speed. Because this method is comparatively
simple, it is used in applications such as speed control in general-purpose inverters. However, since
basic control is performed using V/f control, this method is used in applications that do not require
fast response.

1-15
(b) Vector control with a speed sensor
Vector control is used to implement fast response for AC motors. By controlling an AC motor’s
primary current, magnetic flux current, and torque current separately, vector control attempts to
achieve a similar level of control performance as that for DC motors.
Vector control achieves performance that differs from the V/f control method in the following ways,
making it well suited for use in applications that require fast response and high accuracy:
(1) Good acceleration and deceleration characteristics
(2) Broad speed control range
(3) Torque control capability
(4) Fast control response

Main circuit
Converter Inverter

+ M
3-

Control circuit

ω2* iT* *
Speed VT
calculation circuit

Torque
Voltage vector

controller current
iT controller PWM
ω
＾2 V1
pulse
generation
iM* *
iM* Magnetizing VM circuit
iM current
controller

iM ia
2-phase
iT VD iß /
3-phase
*
ωSL ω1
Slip Integration
frequency circuit
calculation ω
＾2
Magnetic EM Ea
circuit flux angle Inductive
controller voltage
VD calculation
circuit
ET
Eß

Figure 1.3.7 Example Vector Control Architecture

Figure 1.3.7 illustrates an example vector control architecture. Since the vector calculation unit uses
the motor constant, performance varies greatly with the accuracy with which that constant is
understood. Performance is also significantly affected by changes to the constant caused by
temperature conditions. Since the control method is complex, this method is primarily used with
combinations of dedicated inverters and dedicated motors.

1-16
 1.3 Control Methods

(c) Vector control without a speed sensor

Chap. 1
Vector control with a speed sensor offers exceptional performance in terms of fast response and high
accuracy but suffers from issues such as the need to install a speed sensor and route wiring from the
sensor to the inverter. By contrast, vector control without a speed sensor estimates the rotational

OVERVIEW
speed based on the motor’s terminal voltage and primary current without relying on sensor input and
uses the estimated value as the speed feedback signal. Vector control without a speed sensor delivers
performance that is slightly inferior to vector control with a speed sensor.
Figure 1.3.8 illustrates an example of vector control without a speed sensor.

Main circuit
Converter Inverter

+
M

Control circuit

ω2* *
Speed iT*
VT
calculation circuit

Torque
Voltage vector

controller current
iT controller PWM
ω
＾2 V1 pulse
* generation
iM*
iM* Magnetizing VM circuit
iM current
controller

iM ia
2-phase
iT VD iß /
3-phase

Slip ω*SL ω1 Integration

frequency circuit
calculation ω
＾2 Magnetic EM Ea
circuit flux angle Inductive
controller voltage
VD calculation
circuit
ET
Eß

Figure 1.3.8 Example Architecture for Vector Control without a Speed Sensor

The FRENIC-VG can use this type of control when utilized in combination with a general-purpose
motor. However, control performance and other specifications are slightly inferior to those of
applications where the inverter is used in combination with a dedicated motor.

1-17
 FRENIC- VG
2
Chapter 2
SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, dedicated motor specifications,
and terminal functions for the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the external
dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.

Contents

2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load........................................................................ 2-3
2.1.3 LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load..................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Rated current derating ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2 Common Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3 External Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.3.1 Standard models ................................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.3.2 Keypad .............................................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications................................................................................................................ 2-28
2.4.1 Induction motor (IM) with speed sensor ........................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed sensor ................................................. 2-32
2.5 Protective Functions.................................................................................................................................. 2-38
2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions ......................................................................................... 2-42
2.6.1 Connection diagrams......................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.6.1.1 Running the MVK type of an induction motor (dedicated motor) ............................................ 2-42
2.6.1.2 Running the GNF2 type of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (dedicated motor) .......... 2-44
2.6.2 List of terminal functions .................................................................................................................. 2-46
 2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

2.1.1 HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load

Chap. 2
Three-phase 200 V class series
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-2†) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90

SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal applied motor (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 1.9 3.0 4.1 6.8 10 14 18 24 28 34 45 55 68 81 107 131
Rated current (A) 5 8 11 18 27 37 49 63 76 90 119 146 180 215 283 346
150% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Overload capability
200% of the rated current for 3 seconds *3
Main power input: Three-phase,
Phase, voltage, Three-phase, 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,
frequency 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *4
Auxiliary control power
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase
Input power

input: Phase, voltage, - 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,

frequency *5 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *4
Allowable
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *6), Frequency: +5 to -5%
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *7 3.2 6.1 8.9 15.0 21.1 28.8 42.2 57.6 71.0 84.4 114 138 167 203 282 334
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 5.3 9.5 13.2 22.2 31.5 42.7 60.7 80.1 97.0 112 151 185 225 270 － －
Required capacity (kVA)
1.2 2.2 3.1 5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 98 116
*8
Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque,
Braking system,
Separately mounted braking resistor (option),
Braking torque
Separately mounted braking unit (option for FRN75VG1S-2J or higher type)
Carrier frequency (kHz) *9 2 to 15 2 to 10
Approx. mass (kg) 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 12 25 32 42 43 62 105
IP00, UL open type
Enclosure IP20, UL open type
(IP20 is optionally available.)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 0 (HD mode).
A DC reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for HD-mode inverters of 75 kW or above.

*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 220 V.

*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 10 Hz, the inverter may trip earlier due to overload depending on the surrounding
temperature and other conditions.
*3 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 5 Hz, the inverter may trip earlier due to overload depending on the surrounding
temperature and other conditions.
*4 Inverters of 200 to 230 V/50 Hz are available on request.
*5 Use this input as an AC fan power in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter. (Usually, there is no need to use this
input.)
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
*6 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value exceeds 2%, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*7 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity x 10 when the capacity
exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected.
*8 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for inverters of 55 kW or below.)
If the power source uses an electrical generator, it may burn due to the inverter harmonic current. To avoid such an accident, about three or
four times the required capacity should be ensured. (About four times when no DCR is connected; about three times when a DCR is
connected.)
*9 The inverter may automatically reduce the carrier frequency in accordance with the surrounding temperature or output current in order to
protect itself.
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, hundreds digit) lowers the inverter's continuous rated current according
to the carrier frequency setting. (For the details about the rated current lowering characteristics, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1.4.)

2-1
Three-phase 400 V class series
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-4†) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630

Nominal applied motor (kW) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 6.8 10 14 18 24 29 34 45 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 396 445 495 563 731 891
Rated current (A) 9.0 13.5 18.5 24.5 32.0 39.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 91.0 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740 960 1170
150% of the rated current for 1
minute *2
Overload capability
200% of the rated current for 3
seconds *3
Main power input: Three-phase,
Phase, voltage, Three-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,
frequency 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *4
Auxiliary control power
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase,
Input power

input: Phase, voltage, - 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,

frequency *5 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *4
Allowable
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *6), Frequency: +5 to -5%
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *7 7.5 10.6 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 559 628 705 881 1115
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 13.0 17.3 23.2 33 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 -
Required capacity (kVA)
5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 388 436 489 610 773
*8
Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque,
Braking system,
Separately mounted braking resistor (option),
Braking torque
Separately mounted braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher type)
Carrier frequency (kHz) *9 2 to 15 2 to 10 2 to 5
Approx. mass (kg) 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 11 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555
Enclosure IP20, UL open type IP00, UL open type (IP20 is optionally available.)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 0 (HD mode).
A DC reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for HD-mode inverters of 75 kW or above.

*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.

*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 10 Hz, the inverter may trip earlier due to overload depending on the surrounding
temperature and other conditions.
*3 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 5 Hz, the inverter may trip earlier due to overload depending on the surrounding
temperature and other conditions.
*4 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
If the input voltage is 380 V, the output may be reduced. For details, refer to the User's Manual.
*5 Use this input as an AC fan power in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter. (Usually, there is no need to use this
input.)
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
*6 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value exceeds 2%, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*7 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity x 10 when the capacity
exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected.
*8 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for inverters of 55 kW or below.)
If the power source uses an electrical generator, it may burn due to the inverter harmonic current. To avoid such an accident, about three or
four times the required capacity should be ensured. (About four times when no DCR is connected; about three times when a DCR is
connected.)
*9 The inverter may automatically reduce the carrier frequency in accordance with the surrounding temperature or output current in order to
protect itself.
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, hundreds digit) lowers the inverter's continuous rated current according
to the carrier frequency setting. (For the details about the rated current lowering characteristics, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1.4.)

2-2
 2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

2.1.2 MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load

Three-phase 400 V class series

Chap. 2
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-4†) 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400
Nominal applied motor (kW)
110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450
*7
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 160 192 231 287 316 356 445 495 563 640

SPECIFICATIONS
Rated current (A) 210 253 304 377 415 468 585 650 740 840
Overload capability 150% of the rated current for 1 minute
Main power input: Three-phase,
Phase, voltage, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,
frequency 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *2
Auxiliary control power
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase,
Input power

input: Phase, voltage, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,

frequency *3 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *2
Allowable
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *4), Frequency: +5 to -5%
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *5 210 238 286 357 390 443 559 628 705 789
(with DCR)
(without DCR) -
Required capacity (kVA)
140 165 199 248 271 312 388 436 489 547
*6
Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque,
Braking system,
Separately mounted braking resistor (option),
Braking torque
Separately mounted braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher type)
Carrier frequency (kHz) *8 2 to 4
Approx. mass (kg) 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330
Enclosure IP00, UL open type (IP20 is optionally available.)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 3 (MD mode).
To use the inverter in the MD mode, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the MD-mode use when placing an order. The inverter
comes with a DC reactor (DCR) suitable for the nominal applied motor as standard.

*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.

*2 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
If the input voltage is 380 V, the output may be reduced. For details, refer to the User's Manual.
*3 Use this input as an AC fan power in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter. (Usually, there is no need to use this
input.)
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
*4 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value exceeds 2%, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*5 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is equal to "Inverter capacity x 10" and the power supply
with %X = 5% is connected.
*6 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
If the power source uses an electrical generator, it may burn due to the inverter harmonic current. To avoid such an accident, about three or
four times the required capacity should be ensured. (About four times when no DCR is connected; about three times when a DCR is
connected.)
*7 Depending on the load conditions, motor heating may increase due to the low carrier frequency. When placing an order for motors,
therefore, specify the MD-mode use.
*8 Running the PMSM at low carrier frequency may overheat the permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in
demagnetization. The carrier frequency specification of the inverter is low (2 to 4 kHz), so be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency
of the motor. If the MD-mode inverter is not applicable due to the low carrier frequency (2 to 4 kHz), consider the HD mode (H80 = 0).

2-3
2.1.3 LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load
Three-phase 200 V class series
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-2†) 30 37 45 55 75 90
Nominal applied motor (kW) 37 45 55 75 90 110
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 55 68 81 107 131 158
Rated current (A) 146 180 215 283 346 415
Overload capability 120% of the rated current for 1 minute
Main power input: Three-phase,
Phase, voltage, 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,
frequency 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *2
Auxiliary control power
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase,
Input power

input: Phase, voltage, - 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,

frequency *3 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *2
Allowable
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *4), Frequency: +5 to -5%
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *5 138 167 203 282 334 410
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 185 225 270 - － －
Required capacity (kVA)
48 58 71 98 116 143
*6
Braking resistor discharge control: 110% braking torque,
Braking system,
Separately mounted braking resistor (option),
Braking torque
Separately mounted braking unit (option for FRN75VG1S-2J or higher type)
Carrier frequency (kHz) *7 2 to 10 2 to 5
Approx. mass (kg) 25 32 42 43 62 105
Enclosure IP00, UL open type (IP20 is optionally available.)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD mode).
To use the inverter of 55 kW or above in the LD mode, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the LD-mode use when placing an
order. The inverter comes with a DC reactor (DCR) suitable for the nominal applied motor as standard.

*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 220 V.

*2 Inverters of 200 to 230 V/50 Hz are available on request.
*3 Use this input as an AC fan power in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter. (Usually, there is no need to use this
input.)
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
*4 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value exceeds 2%, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*5 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity x 10 when the capacity
exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected.
*6 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for the FRN45VG1S-2J or lower type.)
If the power source uses an electrical generator, it may burn due to the inverter harmonic current. To avoid such an accident, about three or
four times the required capacity should be ensured. (About four times when no DCR is connected; about three times when a DCR is
connected.)
*7 The inverter may automatically reduce the carrier frequency in accordance with the surrounding temperature or output current in order to
protect itself.
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, hundreds digit) lowers the inverter's continuous rated current according
to the carrier frequency setting. (For the details about the rated current lowering characteristics, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1.4.)

2-4
 2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

Three-phase 400 V class series

Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-4†) 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Nominal applied motor (kW) 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 355 400 450 500 630 710

Chap. 2
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 396 495 563 640 731 891 1044
Rated current (A) 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 650 740 840 960 1170 1370
Overload capability 120% of the rated current for 1 minute
Main power input: Three-phase,

SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase,
Phase, voltage, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,
380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *2
Auxiliary control power
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase,
Input power

input: Phase, voltage, - 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,

frequency *3 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *2
Allowable
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *4), Frequency: +5 to -5%
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *5 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 628 705 789 881 1115 1256
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 94.3 114 140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Required capacity
48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 436 489 547 611 773 871
(kVA) *6
Braking resistor discharge control: 110% braking torque,
Braking system,
Separately mounted braking resistor (option),
Braking torque
Separately mounted braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher type)
Carrier frequency (kHz) *7 2 to 10 2 to 5 2
Approx. mass (kg) 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555
Enclosure IP00, UL open type (IP20 is optionally available.)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD mode).
To use the inverter of 55 kW or above in the LD mode, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the LD-mode use when placing an
order. The inverter comes with a DC reactor (DCR) suitable for the nominal applied motor as standard.

*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.

*2 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
If the input voltage is 380 V, the output may be reduced. For details, refer to the User's Manual.
*3 Use this input as an AC fan power in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter. (Usually, there is no need to use this
input.)
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
*4 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value exceeds 2%, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*5 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity x 10 when the capacity
exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected.
*6 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for the FRN45VG1S-4J or lower type.)
If the power source uses an electrical generator, it may burn due to the inverter harmonic current. To avoid such an accident, about three or
four times the required capacity should be ensured. (About four times when no DCR is connected; about three times when a DCR is
connected.)
*7 The inverter may automatically reduce the carrier frequency in accordance with the surrounding temperature or output current in order to
protect itself.
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, hundreds digit) lowers the inverter's continuous rated current according
to the carrier frequency setting. (For the details about the rated current lowering characteristics, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1.4.)

2-5
2.1.4 Rated current derating
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, Hundreds digit) when the inverter drives a
permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) derates the continuous rated current of the inverter according
to the carrier frequency setting (F26). Select the inverter capacity and the carrier frequency (F26) which
match the motor specifications, referring to the tables given below.

HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load

Three-phase 200 V class series
Derated current (A)
Nominal Rated (Derating rate (%))
applied Inverter type current
Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
motor (kW) (A)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5.00 4.50 3.80 5.00 4.55 4.15 3.50
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2† 5
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
8.00 7.20 6.08 8.00 7.28 6.64 5.60
1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2† 8
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
11.0 9.90 8.36 11.0 10.0 9.13 7.70
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2† 11
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
18.0 16.2 13.6 18.0 16.3 14.9 12.6
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2† 18
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
27.0 24.3 20.5 27.0 24.5 22.4 18.9
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2† 27
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
37.0 33.3 28.1 37.0 33.6 30.7 25.9
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2† 37
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
49.0 44.1 37.2 49.0 44.5 40.6 34.3
11 FRN11VG1S-2† 49
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
63.0 56.7 47.8 63.0 57.3 52.2 44.1
15 FRN15VG1S-2† 63
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
76.0 72.2 66.8 76.0 69.9 60
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2† 76
(100%) (95%) (88%) (100%) (92%) (79%)
90.0 85.5 79.2 90.0 82.8 71.1
22 FRN22VG1S-2† 90
(100%) (95%) (88%) (100%) (92%) (79%)
119 117 109 119 113 103
30 FRN30VG1S-2† 119
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
146 144 134 146 138 127
37 FRN37VG1S-2† 146
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
180 178 165 180 171 156
45 FRN45VG1S-2† 180
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
215 212 197 215 204 187
55 FRN55VG1S-2† 215
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
283 274 263 283 271 268 254 *1
75 FRN75VG1S-2† 283
(100%) (97%) (93%) (100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
346 335 321 346 332 328 311 *1
90 FRN90VG1S-2† 346
(100%) (97%) (93%) (100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
*1 The internal carrier frequency is 10 kHz independent of the F26 setting.

2-6
 2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

Three-phase 400 V class series

Derated current (A)
Nominal (Derating rate (%))
Rated
applied motor Inverter type

Chap. 2
current (A) Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
9.00 8.55 7.65 9.00 8.10 6.84
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4† 9
(100%) (95%) (85%) (100%) (90%) (76%)

SPECIFICATIONS
13.5 12.8 11.4 13.5 12.1 10.2
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4† 13.5
(100%) (95%) (85%) (100%) (90%) (76%)
18.5 17.5 15.7 18.5 16.6 14.0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4† 18.5
(100%) (95%) (85%) (100%) (90%) (76%)
24.5 21.8 17.6 24.5 22.2 19.8 16.4
11 FRN11VG1S-4† 24.5
(100%) (89%) (72%) (100%) (91%) (81%) (67%)
32.0 28.4 23.0 32.0 29.1 25.9 21.4
15 FRN15VG1S-4† 32
(100%) (89%) (72%) (100%) (91%) (81%) (67%)
39.0 36.2 32.3 39.0 34.7 28.4
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4† 39
(100%) (93%) (83%) (100%) (89%) (73%)
45.0 41.8 37.3 45.0 40.0 32.8
22 FRN22VG1S-4† 45
(100%) (93%) (83%) (100%) (89%) (73%)
60.0 54.0 45.0 60.0 51.0 41.4
30 FRN30VG1S-4† 60
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
75.0 67.5 56.2 75.0 63.7 51.7
37 FRN37VG1S-4† 75
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
91.0 81.9 68.2 91.0 77.3 62.7
45 FRN45VG1S-4† 91
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
112 100 84.0 112 95.0 77.2
55 FRN55VG1S-4† 112
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
150 141 115 150 130 126 111 *1
75 FRN75VG1S-4† 150
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
176 165 135 176 153 147 130 *1
90 FRN90VG1S-4† 176
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
210 197 161 210 182 176 155 *1
110 FRN110VG1S-4† 210
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
253 237 194 253 220 212 187 *1
132 FRN132VG1S-4† 253
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
304 285 234 304 264 255 224 *1
160 FRN160VG1S-4† 304
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
377 354 290 377 327 316 278 *1
200 FRN200VG1S-4† 377
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
415 390 319 415 361 348 307 *1
220 FRN220VG1S-4† 415
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
520 488 400 520 452 436 384 *1
280 FRN280VG1S-4† 520
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
585 549 450 585 509 491 432 *1
315 FRN315VG1S-4† 585
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
650 611 500 650 565 546 481 *1
355 FRN355VG1S-4† 650
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
740 695 569 740 643 621 547 *1
400 FRN400VG1S-4† 740
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
960 960 *2
500 FRN500VG1S-4† 960
(100%) (100%)
1170 1170 *2
630 FRN630VG1S-4† 1170
(100%) (100%)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
*1 The internal carrier frequency is 10 kHz independent of the F26 setting.
*2 The internal carrier frequency is 5 kHz independent of the F26 setting.

2-7
MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load
Three-phase 400 V class series
Derated current (A)
Nominal (Derating rate (%))
Rated
applied motor Inverter type
current (A) Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
210 210 *1
110 FRN90VG1S-4† 210
(100%) (100%)
253 253 *1
132 FRN110VG1S-4† 253
(100%) (100%)
304 304 *1
160 FRN132VG1S-4† 304
(100%) (100%)
377 377 *1
200 FRN160VG1S-4† 377
(100%) (100%)
415 415 *1
220 FRN200VG1S-4† 415
(100%) (100%)
468 468 *1
280 FRN220VG1S-4† 468
(100%) (100%)
585.0 585.0 *1
315 FRN280VG1S-4† 585
(100%) (100%)
650 650 *1
355 FRN315VG1S-4† 650
(100%) (100%)
740 740 *1
400 FRN355VG1S-4† 740
(100%) (100%)
840 840 *1
450 FRN400VG1S-4† 840
(100%) (100%)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
*1 The internal carrier frequency is 4 kHz independent of the F26 setting.

2-8
 2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load

Three-phase 200 V class series
Derated current (A)

Chap. 2
Nominal (Derating rate (%))
Rated
applied motor Inverter type
current (A) Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
146 140 138 131 *1

SPECIFICATIONS
37 FRN30VG1S-2† 146
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
180 172 171 162 *1
45 FRN37VG1S-2† 180
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
215 206 204 193 *1
55 FRN45VG1S-2† 215
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
283 271 268 254 *1
75 FRN55VG1S-2† 283
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
342 335 346 335 *2
90 FRN75VG1S-2† 346
(99%) (97%) (100%) (97%)
410 402 415 402 *2
110 FRN90VG1S-2† 415
(99%) (97%) (100%) (97%)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
*1 The internal carrier frequency is 10 kHz independent of the F26 setting.
*2 The internal carrier frequency is 5 kHz independent of the F26 setting.

Three-phase 400 V class series

Derated current (A)
Nominal (Derating rate (%))
Rated
applied motor Inverter type
current (A) Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
75.0 66.0 63.0 54.0 *1
37 FRN30VG1S-4† 75
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
91.0 80.0 76.4 65.5 *1
45 FRN37VG1S-4† 91
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
112 99.0 94.0 80.6 *1
55 FRN45VG1S-4† 112
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
150 132 126 108 *1
75 FRN55VG1S-4† 150
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
161 151 176 153 *2
90 FRN75VG1S-4† 176
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
193 180 210 182 *2
110 FRN90VG1S-4† 210
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
232 217 253 220 *2
132 FRN110VG1S-4† 253
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
279 261 304 264 *2
160 FRN132VG1S-4† 304
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
346 324 377 327 *2
200 FRN160VG1S-4† 377
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
481 356 415 361 *2
220 FRN200VG1S-4† 415
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
478 447 520 452 *2
280 FRN220VG1S-4† 520
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
538 503 585 508 *2
355 FRN280VG1S-4† 585
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
598 559 650 565 *2
400 FRN315VG1S-4† 650
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
680 636 740 643 *2
450 FRN355VG1S-4† 740
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
883 825 960 835 *2
500 FRN400VG1S-4† 960
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
1076 1006 1170 1017 *2
630 FRN500VG1S-4† 1170
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
1287 1219 1370 1287 *2
710 FRN630VG1S-4† 1370
(94%) (89%) (100%) (94%)

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
*1 The internal carrier frequency is 10 kHz independent of the F26 setting.
*2 The internal carrier frequency is 5 kHz independent of the F26 setting.

2-9
2.2 Common Specifications
Item Explanation
• Vector control with speed sensor
Control method

For induction motor (IM) • Vector control without speed sensor

Control

• V/f control
For permanent magnet
Vector control with speed sensor & magnetic pole position sensor
synchronous motor (PMSM)
Test mode Simulation mode
Analog setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Speed command
Digital setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Setting
resolution Torque command,
Vector control with speed sensor

Torque current 0.01% of the rated torque

command
Analog setting: ±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)
Control Speed
Digital setting: ±0.005% of maximum speed (at -10 to +50°C)
accuracy
Torque ±3% of the rated torque (when a dedicated motor is in use)
Control
Speed 600 Hz *1
response
Maximum speed 800 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency) *1 *2
1 : 1500
When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 1 to 1500 r/min to maximum speed (in the case
Speed control range of the PG pulse resolution 1024 P/R)
1 : 6 (Constant torque range : Constant output range)
Analog setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Speed command
Digital setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Driving IM

Setting
Vector control without speed sensor

resolution Torque command,

Torque current 0.01% of the rated torque
command
Analog setting: ±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)
Control Speed
Digital setting: ±0.1% of maximum speed (at -10 to +50°C)
accuracy
Torque ±5% of the rated torque
Control
Speed 40 Hz *1
response
Maximum speed 500 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency) *1 *3
1 : 250
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 6 to 1500 r/min to maximum speed
1 : 4 (Constant torque range : Constant output range)
Analog setting: 0.005% of maximum frequency
Setting resolution
Digital setting: 0.005% of maximum frequency
V/f control

Output frequency control Analog setting: ±0.2% of maximum frequency (at 25 ±10°C)
accuracy Digital setting: ±0.01% of maximum frequency (at -10 to +50°C)
Maximum frequency 500 Hz
0.2 to 500 Hz
Control range
1 : 4 (Constant torque range : Constant output range)
*1 The specified value denotes the maximum value. It may not be reached depending on the carrier frequency setting and other conditions.
*2 Under vector control with speed sensor: 400 Hz when the carrier frequency is 5 kHz, 150 Hz when it is 2 kHz.
*3 Under vector control without speed sensor: 250 Hz when the carrier frequency is 5 kHz, 120 Hz when it is 2 kHz.

2-10
 2.2 Common Specifications

Item Explanation
Analog setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Speed command
Digital setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Setting

Chap. 2
Torque command,
Vector control with speed sensor

resolution
Torque current 0.01% of the rated torque
command
Driving PMSM

Analog setting: ±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)

Control Speed

SPECIFICATIONS
Digital setting: ±0.005% of maximum speed (at -10 to +50°C)
accuracy
Torque ±3% of the rated torque (when a dedicated motor is in use)
Control
Speed 600 Hz *1
response
Maximum speed 800 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency) *1 *2
1 : 1500
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 1 to 1500 r/min to maximum speed (in the case
of the PG pulse resolution 1024 P/R)
Keypad: and keys (for forward/reverse rotation), key (for stop)
Start/stop operation Digital input signals: "Switch normal/inverse operation," "Coast to a stop," "Reset
alarm," "Select multistep speed," etc.
Keypad: and keys
External potentiometer: Three-terminal variable resistor (1 to 5kΩ)
Analog input signals: 0 to ±10 V, 4-20 mA
UP/DOWN control: When the digital input signal UP or DOWN is ON, the
speed increases or decreases, respectively.
Multistep speed: The combination of the four digital input signals SS1, SS2,
Speed setting SS4 and SS8 enables 15 different speeds to be selected.
Digital signal: Using an option card enables speed setting with "16-bit
parallel signals."
Serial link operation: RS-485 (provided as standard).
Various communication options are available.
Jogging operation: and keys or digital input on [FWD] and [REV]
terminals in jogging mode.
Control functions

IM: +15 V, +12 V complementary output PG (insulation type),

Maximum frequency receivable: 100 kHz
+5 V line driver output PG:
Maximum frequency receivable: 500 kHz
when the communications option OPC-VG1-PG (insulation type) is
mounted.
PMSM: +5 V line driver output PG (insulation type):
ABS type:
Speed detection Maximum frequency receivable: 100 kHz
when the communications option OPC-VG1-PMPG is mounted.
ABZ type:
Maximum frequency receivable: 500 kHz
when the communications option OPC-VG1-PG is mounted.
High-resolution serial transmission system (TS5667N253: TAMAGAWA
SEIKI, Co., Ltd.)
17 bits (one rotation) + 16 bits (multi-rotation)
when the option card OPC-VG1-SPGT is mounted.
PI calculation with feed-forward terms.
Speed control
Control parameters switchable by external signals.
Transistor output signals: "Inverter running," "Speed arrival," "Speed detected,"
"Inverter overload early warning," "Torque limiting," etc.
Running status signal
Analog output signals: "Motor speed," "Output voltage," "Torque," "Load
factor," etc.

*1 The specified value denotes the maximum value. It may not be reached depending on the carrier frequency setting and other conditions.
*2 Under vector control with speed sensor: 400 Hz when the carrier frequency is 5 kHz, 150 Hz when it is 2 kHz.

2-11
 Item Explanation
0.01 to 3600 s
Acceleration/ (Four independent settings can be made for each of acceleration and deceleration. They are
deceleration time selectable with external signals.)
(S-curve acceleration/deceleration in addition to linear acceleration/deceleration)
Proportional relationship between analog speed setting and motor speed can be specified in
Speed setting gain
the range of 0 to 200%.
Jump speed Jump speed (3 points) and jump hysteresis width (1 point) can be specified.
Auto search for idling motor Automatically searches for the idling motor speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it
speed without stopping it. (Available under vector control with/without speed sensor)
Auto-restart after momentary Possible to restart the inverter after a momentary power failure without stopping the motor
power failure depending on the restart mode setting.
Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load for stabilized operation.
Slip compensation
(Available for IM under V/f control.)
Droop control The motor speed droops in proportion to output torque. (Not available under V/f control.)
Limits the torque to the predetermined values (selectable from "common to 4 quadrants",
Torque limit "independent driving and braking", etc.)
Analog and external signal (2 steps) settings are available.
Analog setting: 0 to ±10V/0 to ±150% (Up to 300% by gain adjustment)
Torque control
Digital setting: Using an option card enables torque control with "16-bit parallel signals."
PID control with analog input
PID control Possible to select whether to use the PID output as speed setting or auxiliary setting to be
added or subtracted to/from the main setting.
Stops cooling fans when the motor is stopped and the temperature is low for lifetime
Control functions

Cooling fan ON/OFF control

extension and noise reduction of the cooling fans.
Monitors communication between the host equipment (PLC) and the inverter to see
Toggle monitor control
whether the communication is normal.
The combination of the fixed value (one step, with the polarity switching function by the
motor rotation direction) and digital input signals TB1 and TB2 provides three steps of
Torque bias torque bias internal setting.
Analog setting (with Hold function) is available.
Selectable from the three types of motors, by Function code F79.
Motor selection
Switchable between the three types of motors by the combination of digital input signals.
NTC thermistor (Equivalent to Fuji Electric specifications)
Temperature detection PTC thermistor exclusively used for protection from motor overheat (The trip level is
specified by parameters.)
Self-diagnostic function for
Self-diagnoses the detection circuit of pulse encoder input signals (PA and PB).
PG detection circuit
Calculates the maximum allowable elevating speed (e.g., vertical carrier machine)
Load adaptive control
according to the load to improve the operation efficiency of the equipment.
Multiwinding
motor drive
Multiplex The option OPC-VG1-TBSI is required.
system Reactor joint Available only under vector control with/without speed sensor (available soon).
drive
(Available soon)
Speed setting by the combination of digital input signals UP, DOWN, and CLR ("Clear
UP/DOWN control
ACC/DEC to zero")
Stop function Three types of the stop functions by digital input signals STOP1, STOP2, and STOP3.
Outputs pulse generator signals (input pulses) with frequency divided to 1/n (where, n is
programmable with Function code E29).
PG pulse output
Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage on the
[PGP] terminal) transistor outputs, by the slide switch in the inverter unit.

2-12
 2.2 Common Specifications

Item Explanation
Observer Suppresses load disturbances and vibrations.
Tunes the motor while the motor is stopped or running, for setting up motor

Chap. 2
Offline tuning
parameters.
Control functions

Online tuning Tunes the motor parameters to compensate for the temperature change.
Standard function: Position control by servo-lock and integrated oscillation circuit

SPECIFICATIONS
Option: OPC-VG1-PG (PR): For pulse command input of line driver type
Position control OPC-VG1-PGo (PR): For pulse command input of open collector type
OPC-VG7-SPGT: 17-bit high resolution ABS encoder (available
soon)
Option: OPC-VG1-PG (PR): For pulse command input of line driver type
Pulse train, synchronous operation
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR): For pulse command input of open collector type
Display 7-segment LED monitor and backlit LCD
Japanese, English, Chinese, and Korean
Multilingual display
(French, Spanish, German, and Italian are available soon.)
• Detected speed • Speed command
• Output frequency • Reference torque current value
• Torque command value • Torque calculation value
• Power consumption (Motor output) • Output current
• Output voltage • DC link circuit voltage
• Magnetic-flux command value • Magnetic-flux calculation value
• Load shaft speed • PID command value
When the inverter is running or
stopped • PID feedback value • PID output value
• Ai adjusted value (12) • Ai adjusted value (Ai1)
• Ai adjusted value (Ai2) • Optional monitor 1 to 6
• Presence of digital input/output signal • Motor temperature
• Heat sink temperature • Load factor
• Input power • Input watt-hour
• Operation time
• Cumulative run time of the motor/Number of startups (for each motor), etc.
When function codes are
Function code names and data are displayed.
configured
Alarm factors that appear:
Indication/Setting

• dbh (Braking resistor overheated) • dcf (DC fuse blown)

Keypad

• ef (Ground fault) • er1 (Memory error)

• er2 (Keypad communications error) • er3 (CPU error)
• er4 (Communications error) • er5 (RS-485 communications error)
• er6 (Operation error) • er7 (Output wire fault)
• er8 (A/D converter error) • er9 (Speed mismatch)
• lin (Input phase loss) • lu (Undervoltage)
• nrb (NTC wire break error) • 0c (Overcurrent)
• 0h1 (Heat sink overheat) • 0h2 (External alarm)
• 0h3 (Inverter internal overheat) • 0h4 (Motor protection)
• 0l1 (Overload of motor 1) • 0l2 (Overload of motor 2)
When an alarm occurs
• 0l3 (Overload of motor 3) • 0lu (Inverter overload)
• 0s (Overspeed) • 0u (Overvoltage)
• p9 (PG wire break) • pbf (Charger circuit fault)
• dba (Braking transistor broken) • err (Mock alarm)
• 0pl (Output phase loss) • dfa (DC fan locked)
• erh (Hardware error) • ec (Encoder communications error)
• era (UPAC error) (Available soon) • et1 (Encoder error)
• erb (Inter-inverter communications link error)
• ecf (ENABLE circuit (safety stop circuit) failure) (Available soon)
• d0 (Excessive positioning deviation)
• loc (Start delay) • are (E-SX error)
• arf (Toggle abnormality error)

2-13
 Item Explanation
The light-alarm display l-al appears.
When a light alarm occurs
The inverter retains the cause of the light alarm to display it.
The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the last
three pieces of alarm information to display them.
It also retains the detailed contents of the latest and the last 3 alarms (including light
Keypad

alarms) to display them.

When the inverter is running or
The calendar clock function retains the date and time when an alarm occurred to
an alarm occurs
display them. (Precision: ±27 seconds/month (Ta = 25°C))
Data retention period: At least 5 years (at the surrounding temperature 25°C)
*Backup battery: 30 kW or above (Battery integrated as standard)
Up to 22 kW (Optional battery)
Reads out the sampling data held in the inverter and shows it graphically.
Historical trace *1
Indication/Setting

Sampling interval: 50 μs to 1 s
Reads out the current data of the running inverter and shows it graphically in
Real-time trace *1 real-time.
Sampling interval: 1 ms to 1 s
FRENIC-VG Loader

Reads out the sampling data held in the inverter and shows it graphically when an
alarm has occurred.
Sampling interval: 50 μs to 1s (400 μs for sampling data except current)
Traceback The sampling data is retained in the memory by the backup battery.
Data retention period: At least 5 years (at the surrounding temperature 25°C)
*Backup battery: 30 kW or above (Battery integrated as standard)
Up to 22 kW (Optional battery)
Operation monitor *1 I/O monitor, system monitor, alarm history monitor, etc.
Shows the configuration of the function codes, as well as enabling editing,
Configuration of function code
transmitting, comparing, and initialization.
Lights when power is applied to the inverter unit. (Lights when power is applied to
Charge lamp
the control circuit only.)
Main circuit capacitor life Life judgment function installed
Maintenance

• Retains and displays the cumulative run time of the main circuit capacitor and the
cumulative run time of cooling fans.
Common functions • Retains and displays the inverter operation time.
• Retains and displays the maximum output current and the maximum internal
temperature for the past one hour.
I/O terminals for RS-485 communication.
Communications

RS-485 Up to 31 inverter units can be connected in multi-drop connection.

Half-duplex system
Accessible from the front, A connector type: mini B
USB
USB 2.0 Full Speed
Compatible with the VG7 function codes, except function codes for the 3rd motor.
(Using the VG7 function codes as is produces the same operation on the
Function code data FRENIC-VG.)
Compatibility

VG7 Possible to read out VG7 function code data using the FRENIC-VG Loader and
write it as is into the FRENIC-VG. (Except special inverter versions)
Various Fully compatible with T-Link, SX-bus, and CC-Link.
communications tools (Software in the host equipment PLC is available as is. Except special software.)
Mounting adapters are provided for matching the FRENIC-VG with conventional
Mounting adapter
models in mounting dimensions.

*1 Available in the paid-for version of FRENIC-VG Loader (WPS-VG1-PCL).

2-14
 2.2 Common Specifications

Item Explanation
Safe Torque Off (STO) (Available soon)
function
Safety

Provided as Opening the circuit between terminals [EN1] and [PS] or [EN2] and [PS] by the

Chap. 2
Stop function
standard external digital input signal turns off the inverter's output transistor so that the motor
coasts to a stop.
UL Standards and Canadian Standards
UL, cUL (UL508C, C22.2 No.14) (during authentication)

SPECIFICATIONS
European Standards
EN 61800-5-2: SIL2 (during authentication)
EN 62061: SIL2 (during authentication)
Product standards

Machinery Directive
ISO13849-1: PL-d (during authentication)
Conformity with standards EN 60204-1: Stop category 0 (during authentication)
Low Voltage Directive
EN 61800-5-1 (Overvoltage category: 3) (during authentication)
EMC Standards
EN 61800-3 (during authentication), EN 61326-3-1 (during authentication)
(Emission) EMC-filter (optional): Category C2
(Immunity) 2nd Env.
Shall be free from corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil mist, dusts, and direct
Installation location
sunlight. (Pollution degree 2 (IEC60664-1)). Indoor use only.
-10 to +50°C (-10 to +40°C when installed side-by-side without clearance (22 kW or
Surrounding temperature
below))
Relative humidity 5 to 95% RH (without condensation)
Environment

Altitude Lower than 1,000 m

200 V 55 kW, 400 V 75 kW or below 200V 75 kW, 400 V 90 kW or above
3 mm: 2 to less than 9 Hz, 3 mm: 2 to less than 9 Hz
Vibration 9.8m/s2: 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m/s2: 9 to less than 55 Hz
2 m/ s2: 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m/s2: 55 to less than 200 Hz
1 m/ s2: 55 to less than 200 Hz
Storage temperature -25 to +70°C
Storage humidity 5 to 95% RH (without condensation)

2-15
2.3 External Dimensions
2.3.1 Standard models
The diagrams below show external dimensions of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters according to the
inverter capacity. (Three-phase 200 V/400 V class series)
A figure given in the lower right-hand corner of each set of drawings shows the dimension of panel cutting
required for external cooling. To employ external cooling for inverters of 22 kW or below, the optional
mounting adapter for external cooling is necessary. For the external dimensions of the mounting adapter,
refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.8 "Mounting adapter for external cooling."
(Unit: mm)
„ FRN0.75 to 7.5VG1S-2†
„ FRN3.7 to 7.5VG1S-4†

„ FRN11 to 22VG1S-2†
„ FRN11 to 22VG1S-4†

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-16
 2.3 External Dimensions

A figure given in the lower right-hand corner of each set of drawings shows the dimension of panel cutting
required for employing external cooling. To employ external cooling for inverters of 30 kW or above, change
the positions of the mounting bases. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.2 "Installing the Inverter, „
When employing external cooling."

Chap. 2
(Unit: mm)
„ FRN30VG1S-2†
„ FRN30/37VG1S-4†

SPECIFICATIONS
„ FRN37VG1S-2†
„ FRN45VG1S-4†

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-17
 (Unit: mm)
„ FRN45VG1S-2†

„ FRN55VG1S-2†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

2 terminal holes
(for screw J)

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure D

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
DCR2-55B *1 D 190 160 131 90 100 M6 (φ8) 210 250 M12 16
HD mode
DCR2-55C *1 C 255 225 96 76 140 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 11
LD mode DCR2-75C C 255 225 106 86 145 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 12

*1 The DCR2-55B and DCR2-55C are optionally available.

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-18
 2.3 External Dimensions

(Unit: mm)
„ FRN75VG1S-2†

Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR2-75C 255 225 106 86 145 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 12
C
LD mode DCR2-90C 255 225 116 96 155 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 14

„ FRN90VG1S-2†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR2-90C 255 225 116 96 155 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 14
C
LD mode DCR2-110C 300 265 116 90 185 M8 (10*18) 160 - M12 17

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-19
 (Unit: mm)
„ FRN55VG1S-4†
2 terminal holes
(for screw J)

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure B

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
DCR4-55B *1 B 171 110 170 130 110 M6 (φ8) 150 210 M8 20
HD mode
DCR4-55C *1 C 255 225 96 76 120 M6 (7*13) 145 - M10 11
LD mode DCR4-75C C 255 225 106 86 125 M6 (7*13) 145 - M10 13

*1 The DCR4-55B and DCR4-55C are optionally available.

„ FRN75VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-75C 255 225 106 86 125 M6 (7*13) 145 - M10 13
C
LD mode DCR4-90C 255 225 116 96 140 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 15

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-20
 2.3 External Dimensions

(Unit: mm)
„ FRN90VG1S-4†

Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-90C 255 225 116 96 140 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 15
MD mode C
DCR4-110C 300 265 116 90 175 M8 (10*18) 155 - M12 19
LD mode

„ FRN110VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-110C 300 265 116 90 175 M8 (10*18) 155 - M12 19
MD mode C
DCR4-132C 300 265 126 100 180 M8 (10*18) 160 - M12 22
LD mode

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-21
 (Unit: mm)
„ FRN132VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-132C 300 265 126 100 180 M8 (10*18) 160 - M12 22
MD mode C
DCR4-160C 350 310 131 103 180 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 26
LD mode

„ FRN160VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-160C 350 310 131 103 180 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 26
MD mode C
DCR4-200C 350 310 141 113 185 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 30
LD mode

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-22
 2.3 External Dimensions

(Unit: mm)
„ FRN200VG1S-4†

Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-200C 350 310 141 113 185 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 30
MD mode C
DCR4-220C 350 310 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 33
LD mode

„ FRN220VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-220C 350 310 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 33
MD mode DCR4-250C C 350 310 161 133 210 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 35
LD mode DCR4-280C 350 310 161 133 210 M10 (12*22) 190 - M16 37

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-23
 (Unit: mm)
„ FRN280VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure E

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-280C 350 310 161 133 210 M10 (12*22) 190 - M16 37
C
MD mode DCR4-315C 400 345 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - M16 40
LD mode DCR4-355C E 400 345 156 128 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - 4*M12 49

„ FRN315VG1S-4†

2 terminal
4 holes
mounting (for screw J)
holes
(for screw G)

Figure C

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure E

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-315C C 400 345 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - M16 40
MD mode DCR4-355C 400 345 156 128 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - 4*M12 49
E
LD mode DCR4-400C 445 385 145 117 213 M10 (12*22) 245 - 4*M12 52

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
2-24
 2.3 External Dimensions

(Unit: mm)
„ FRN355VG1S-4†

Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
(for screw J)

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure E

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-355C 400 345 156 128 200 M10(12*22) 225 - 4*M12 49
MD mode DCR4-400C E 445 385 145 117 213 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 52
LD mode DCR4-450C 440 385 150 122 215 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 62

„ FRN400VG1S-4†

2 terminal
holes
(for screw J)

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)

Figure E

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-400C 445 385 145 117 213 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 52
MD mode DCR4-450C E 440 385 150 122 215 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 62
LD mode DCR4-500C 445 390 165 137 220 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 72

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-25
 (Unit: mm)
„ FRN500VG1S-4† 2 terminal
holes
(for screw J)

4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure E

4 mounting holes
(for screw G)

2 terminal holes
(for screw J)

Figure F

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-500C E 445 390 165 137 220 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 72
LD mode DCR4-630C F 285 145 203 170 195 M12(14*20) 480 - 2*M12 75

„ FRN630VG1S-4†

4 mounting holes
(for screw G)

2 terminal holes
(for screw J)

Figure F

Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-630C 285 145 203 170 195 M12 (14*20) 480 - 2*M12 75
F
LD mode DCR4-710C 340 160 295 255 225 M12 (φ15) 480 - 4*M12 95

Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.

2-26
 2.3 External Dimensions

2.3.2 Keypad

Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS

2-27
2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications
2.4.1 Induction motor (IM) with speed sensor
● Standard specifications for three-phase 200 V series
Item Specifications
Dedicated
motor rated 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
output (kW)
Applicable
motor type 8095A 8097A 8107A 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A
(MVK_)
Moment of
inertia of rotor 0.009 0.009 0.009 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03
(kg•m2)
Rotor GD2
0.036 0.036 0.036 0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12
(kg•m2)
Rated speed/
1500/
Max. speed 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400
2000
(r/min)
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less
Voltage 200/50 Hz,
200 to 210 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz
(V) 200, 220 V/60 Hz
Number
of
- Single-phase, 4P Three-phase, 4P
phases/
Cooling poles
fan
Input
power - 40/50 90/120 150/210 80/120 270/390
(W)
Current 0.76/
- 0.29/0.27 to 0.31 0.49/0.44 to 0.48 0.75/0.77 to 0.8 1.9/2.0, 2.0
(A) 0.8, 0.8
Approx. mass
28 29 32 46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570
(kg)

2-28
 2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications

● Standard specifications for three-phase 400 V series

Item Specifications
Dedicated

Chap. 2
motor rated 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220
output (kW)
Applicable
motor type 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A 9284A 9286A 528KA 528LA 531FA
(MVK_)

SPECIFICATIONS
Moment of
inertia of rotor 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03 1.54 1.77 1.72 1.83 2.33
(kg•m2)
Rotor GD2
0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12 6.16 7.08 6.88 7.32 9.32
(kg•m2)
Rated speed /
Max. speed 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400 1500/2000
(r/min)
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less
Voltage 200 to 210 V/50 Hz, 380, 400, 415 V/50 Hz,
400 to 420 V/50 Hz, 400 to 440 V/60 Hz 400 V/50 Hz, 400, 440 V/60 Hz
(V) 200 to 230 V/60 Hz 400, 440 V/ 60 Hz
Number
of
Single-phase, 4P Three-phase, 4P
phases/
Cooling poles
fan
Input
80/
power 40/50 90/120 150/210 270/390 2200 3700
120
(W)
Current 0.27/ 0.39/ 7.8/
0.29/0.27 to 0.31 0.38/0.39 to 0.4 1.0/1.0, 1.0 4.6/4.3,4.1
(A) 0.24 to 0.25 0.4, 0.4 7.1, 7.6
Approx. mass
46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570 710 760 1270 1310 1630
(kg)

Item Specifications
Dedicated
motor rated 250 280 300 315 355 400
output (kW)
Applicable
motor type 531GA 531HA 535GA 535GA 535HA 535JA
(MVK_)
Moment of
inertia of rotor 2.52 2.76 5.99 5.99 6.53 7.18
(kg•m2)
Rotor GD2
10.08 12.34 23.96 23.96 26.12 28.72
(kg•m2)
Rated speed /
Max. speed 1500/2000
(r/min)
Vibration V15 or less
Voltage
400 V/50 Hz, 400, 440 V/60 Hz
(V)
Number
of
Three-phase, 4P
phases/
Cooling poles
fan
Input
power 3700
(W)
Current
7.8/7.1, 7.6
(A)
Approx. mass
1685 1745 2230 2230 2310 2420
(kg)

2-29
● Common specifications
Item Specifications
Insulation class,
Class F, 4P
Number of poles
Main terminal box (lug type):
Three or six main circuit terminals,
Two NTC thermistor terminals (MVK8 series),
Terminal structure Three NTC thermistor terminals (MVK9 or MVK5 series. One terminal is reserved.)
Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block):
Pulse generator (PGP, PGM, PA, PB, SS), cooling fan (FU, FV or FU, FV, FW)
Foot mounted with bracket (IMB3),
Mounting method
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative for other mounting.
IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. A cooling fan blows air over the motor
Degree of protection, toward the drive-end.
Cooling method
*Only MVK8095A (0.75 kW): Self-cooling
Installation location Indoors, 1000 m or less in altitude.
Ambient temperature,
-10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
Finishing color Munsell N5
MVK8 series: JEM1466 or JEC-2137-2000
Standard conformity
MVK9 or MVK5 series: JEC-2137-2000
Pulse generator (1024 P/R, +15V, complementary output), NTC thermistor(s) (1 or 2), and
Standard accessories
cooling fan (except MVK8095A)

Note 1: For applicable motors of 55 kW or above, the torque accuracy is ±5%. When higher accuracy is required, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
Note 2: For dedicated motors other than 4-pole ones with the base speed of 1500 r/min, contact your Fuji Electric representative.

2-30
 2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications

● External dimensions of dedicated motors

● Figure A ● Figure B
Shaft extension

Chap. 2
Main Main
Aux terminal box terminal box Aux terminal box terminal box

SPECIFICATIONS
(L & R)
(L & R)

● Figure C ● Figure D ● Figure E

Aux terminal box Main terminal box
for fan
Aux terminal box
Main terminal box
Aux terminal for PG
box for fan

Aux terminal box Main

terminal box

(L & R)

Aux terminal box

for PG

● Dimensions common to 200V and 400V series

Motor Dimensions (mm) Shaft extension (mm)
Approx
rated
Motor type Fig. .mass
output A C D E F G I J K K1 K2 KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W (kg)
(kW)
0.75 MVK8095A 201.5 204 370 28
90 70 62.5 10 195 35.5 35.5 189 170 150 168.5 56 10 50 24j6
1.5 MVK8097A 277.5 446 29
A 203 27 7 4 8
2.2 MVK8107A 292 100 80 12.5 238 40 190 485 195 170 193 63 32
40 60 0.5 28j6
3.7 MVK8115A 299 112 236 95 70 14 270 205 499 224 175 200 70 46
12
5.5 MVK8113A 309 50 548 180 239 63
B 132 273 108 17 311 45 34 223 250 89 80 38k6 10
7.5 MVK8135A 328 89 586 212 258 73
8 5
11 MVK8165A 400 105 723 250 323 111
160 321 127 18 376 50 63 272 300 108 1 42k6 12
15 MVK8167A 422 127 767 300 345 133
48
18.5 MVK8184A A 14.5 110 190
435 120.5 - - 786.5 292 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14
22 MVK8185A 180 376 139.5 20 428 75 75 305 350 121 1.5 197
30 MVK8187A 454 139.5 60 824.5 330 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 235
37 MVK8207A 280
490 200 411 159 152.5 466 85 364 915.5 390 360 425.5 133 60m6
45 MVK8208A C 25 80 18.5 11 7 18 296
55 MVK9224A 723 225 445 178 143 515 95 391 1155 436 366 432 149 140 65m6 380
75 MVK9254A 693.5 155.5 80 1157 411 463.5 2 510
250 545 203 30 743 106 506 168 75m6 12 7.5 20
90 MVK9256A 711.5 174.5 1194 449 483.5 570
D 100 120
110 MVK9284A 764 184 1308 468 544 710
605 35 798 203 557 24
132 MVK9286A 789.5 209.5 1359 519 569.5 760
280 228.5 190 85m6 22
160 MVK528JA 1230
1015.5 628 228.5 30 1234 125 120 210 1604 560 557 588.5 1
200 MVK528LA 170 14 9 1350
220 MVK531FA 1690
250 MVK531GA 1073 315 689 254 254 1425 150 140 240 1713 630 648 640 216 95m6 25 1750
280 MVK531HA E - 102 413 1820
300 36 28 2
MVK535GA 2230
315 100m
1111 355 778 305 355 1510 160 180 330 1956 730 890 845 280 210 16 10 28
355 MVK535HA 6 2310
400 MVK535JA 2420

Note 1: The MVK8095A (0.75 kW) has a shaft-driven fan (Cooling system: IC410).
Note 2: The MVK8095A (0.75 kW) has a single cable lead-in hole of φ22.
Note 3: The MVK9224A (55 kW) has an auxiliary terminal box for fan, in addition to the configuration shown in Figure C.
Note 4: Dimensional tolerance of rotary shaft height C
C ≤ 250 mm: 0 to -0.5 mm, C > 250 mm: 0 to 1.0 mm

2-31
2.4.2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed
sensor
● Standard specifications for three-phase 200 V series
Item Specifications
Dedicated motor rated output (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A
Moment of inertia of rotor (kg•m2) 0.018 0.021 0.027 0.036 0.065 0.070 0.090 0.153 0.191 0.350 0.467 0.805
Rotor GD2 (kg•m2) 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220
Base speed/Max. speed (r/min) 1500/2000
Rated current (A) 20/20 29/29 42/42 57/57 71/70 82/81 113/108 144/144 165/165 200/200 270/270 316/316
Vibration V10 or less
Voltage (V), Frequency (Hz) 200 to 240, 50/60 200 to 210/50, 200 to 230/60
Number of phases/poles Three-phase, 2P Three-phase, 4P
Cooling
fan Input power (W) 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210
0.49/
Current (A) 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.75/0.77 to 0.8
0.44 to 0.48
Approx. mass (kg) 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420

● Standard specifications for three-phase 400 V series

Item Specifications
Dedicated motor rated output (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A
Moment of inertia of rotor (kg•m2) 0.018 0.021 0.027 0.036 0.065 0.070 0.090 0.153 0.191 0.350 0.467 0.805
Rotor GD2 (kg•m2) 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220
Base speed/Max. speed (r/min) 1500/2000
Rated current (A) 10/10 15/15 21/21 29/29 36/35 41/41 57/54 72/72 83/83 100/100 135/135 158/158
Vibration V10 or less
Voltage (V), Frequency (Hz) 200 to 240, 50/60 400 to 420/50, 400 to 440/60
Number of phases/poles Three-phase, 2P Three-phase, 4P
Cooling
fan Input power (W) 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210
0.27/
Current (A) 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.38/0.39 to 0.4
0.24 to 0.25
Approx. mass (kg) 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420

Item Specifications
Dedicated motor rated output (kW) 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 300
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2224B 2226B 2254B 2256B 2284B 2286B
Moment of inertia of rotor (kg•m2) 0.882 0.994 1.96 2.22 2.89 3.24
Rotor GD2 (kg•m2) 3.53 3.98 7.84 8.88 11.6 13.0
Base speed/Max. speed (r/min) 1500/2000
Rated current (A) 198 232 273 340 369 420 480 520
Vibration V10 or less
Voltage (V) 380, 400, 415/400, 415, 440, 460
Number of phases/poles Three-phase, 4P
Cooling Power frequency (Hz) 50/60
fan
Input power (W) 80/120 270/390
0.36, 0.38, 0.41/0.4,
Current (A) 0.95, 0.95, 1/1, 1, 1, 1
0.4, 0.4, 0.4
Approx. mass (kg) 520 580 760 810 1020 1080

2-32
 2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications

● Common specifications
Item Specifications
Insulation class,
Class F, 6P

Chap. 2
Number of poles
Main terminal box (lug type):
Three or six main circuit terminals,
Two NTC thermistor terminals (Three for 110 kW or above. One terminal is reserved.)
Terminal structure

SPECIFICATIONS
Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block):
Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Pulse encoder (connector type), Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Rotation direction CCW when viewed from the drive side
Legs mounted (IMB3)
Mounting method
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative for other mounting.
Overload resistance 150% for 1 minute
Time rating S1
Degree of protection, IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. A cooling fan blows air over the motor
Cooling method toward the drive-end.
Installation location Indoors, 1000 m or less in altitude.
Ambient temperature,
-10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
5.5 to 90 kW: 80 dB (A) or less at 1 m,
Noise
110 to 300 kW: 90 dB(A) or less at 1 m
Vibration resistance 6.86 m/s2 (0.7 G)
Finishing color Munsell N1.2
Standard conformity JEM1487: 2005
Pulse encoder (1024 P/R, +5VDC, A, B, Z, U, V, W line driver output),
Standard built-in parts One NTC thermistor (Two for 110 kW or above) and
Cooling fan

2-33
● External dimensions of dedicated motors
Shaft extension

● Figure A ● Figure B ● Figure C

Encoder connector Encoder connector Encoder connector

Aux terminal Main terminal Aux terminal Main terminal Aux terminal Main terminal
box box box box box box

(L & R) (L & R)
(L & R)

● Figure D ● Figure E ● Figure F

Aux terminal box

Aux terminal box Main terminal box Aux terminal Main terminal box
(L & R) for fan box for fan
Encoder Main terminal Encoder
connector box connector Encoder
connector

● Dimensions common to 200V and 400V series

Motor Dimensions (mm) Shaft extension (mm)
Approx.
rated Flame
Motor type Fig. mass
output no. A C D E F G I J K KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W Y (kg)
(kW)
5.5 GNF2114A 51
112Mh 335.5 70 14 40 34 200 555.5 224 175 220 70 12 80 0.5 38k6 10
7.5 GNF2115A 55
112 235 95 270 8 5
11 GNF2117A 69
112Jh 380.5 100 18 55 235 698.5 228 318 1 42k6 12
15 GNF2118A A 50 M10X20 78
48 238
18.5 GNF2136A 14.5 110 100
132Lh 386 101.5 705.5 319.5 48k6 9 5.5 14
22 GNF2137A 132 272 108 311 45 247 250 108 1.5 106
30 GNF2139A 132Hh 424.5 140 20 60 782.5 313 358 55m6 10 6 16 127
37 GNF2165A 160Lg 470.5 127 845.5 300 375 170
160 319 139.5 376 75 75 320 350 60m6
45 GNF2167A 160Jg B 501 157.5 906.5 370 405.5 18.5 11 7 18 192
55 GNF2185A 180Lg 510 139.5 80 85 910.5 390 330 400.5 121 140 2 65m6 M12X25 247
180 375 159 428 356
75 GNF2187A 180Jg C 576 177.5 25 1061.5 420 450 485.5 325
100 75m6 12 7.5 20
90 GNF2207A 200Jg 618.5 200 410 178 549 80 107 1126.5 450 479 508 420
200 168
110 GNF2224B 225Kg D 711 1249 526 538 520
225 446 203 28 628 100 142 506 24 85m6 22
132 GNF2226B 225Hg 761 250 1349 626 588 580
160 GNF2254B 508 760
250Hg E 829 250 228.5 32 763 203 1469 557 677
200 GNF2256B 505 810
120 170 1 14 9 M20×35
220 1020
GNF2284B 280 640 190 95m6 25
250 1020
280Jf F 881 280 570 254 35 878 120 102 303 1521 628 680 28
280 1080
GNF2286B
300 1080

Note 1: Models of 110 kW output or above are exclusive to direct connection. For indirect connection, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
Note 2: Dimensional tolerance of rotary shaft height C
C ≤ 250 mm: 0 to -0.5 mm, C > 250 mm: 0 to 1.0 mm

2-34
 2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications

● Exclusive cables to inverter connection

Name Specifications (Structure)
Overview

Chap. 2
Plug
Terminal

Inverter side Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.

Motor side

SPECIFICATIONS
The shield layer of the cable is connect-
ed to CN15 only at the motor side. White marking position

• Wiring • Pin assignment

Connector # at the Connector # at At the motor side
Function
motor side the inverter side White marking position
1 9 or 20 Power +5V
2 10 or 19 0V common
3 3 A phase
4 2 A phase reversed
5 5 B phase
6 4 B phase reversed
Exclusive cables to 7 - Z phase (*1)
inverter connection 8 - Z phase reversed
(*1) Viewed from P in the above figure
9 8 Magnetic pole
position F0
10 7 Magnetic pole Optional OPC-VG1-PMPG connector
position *F0
11 13 Magnetic pole
position F1
12 12 Magnetic pole
position *F1
13 15 Magnetic pole
position F2
14 14 Magnetic pole
position *F2
Inside the connector
15 - Shield layer
(*1) For the PG card (OPC-VG1-PMPG), no Z
phase or Z phase reversed are required.
Models of cables
Wiring length Model L dimension
Max. 5 m CB-VG1-PMPG-05S 5m
Max. 10 m CB-VG1-PMPG-10S 10 m
Max. 30 m CB-VG1-PMPG-30S 30 m

2-35
 Name Specifications (Structure)

Three-phase (U, V, W) interface

Main power supply MOTOR
Three-phase power supply FRENIC-VG
50/60 Hz
U U
L1/R
V V
L2/S SM
W W
L3/T

9 or 20 +5 VDC 1
PGP
10 or 19 0V 2
PGM
3 A 3
PA
2 Anot 4
*PA
5 B 5
PB
4 Bnot 6

OPC-VG1-PMPG
*PB
8 U 9 PG
Connection example F0
7 Unot 10
*F0
13 V 11
F1
12 Vnot 12
*F1
15 W 13
F2
14 Wnot 14
*F2
15
F3 SS E
No connection
*F3 (*2)

E E

(*2) When the customer produces the inverter connection cable, the shield (SS) of the PG shield layer should be connected
to CN15 at the motor side. No connection is required at the inverter side.

2-36
 2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications

● Reference: Connectors and contact terminals recommended

The following specifications are recommended for customers who produce inverter connection cables.
At the inverter side: Connector (10320-52F0-008) At the motor side: Connector contact terminal

Chap. 2
Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd. (JN1-22-22F-PKG100)
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited

SPECIFICATIONS
Logo position

Max. applicable wire size:

AWG20 (Outer dia. of coated cable: φ1.5 mm or less)

At the motor side: Straight plug connector (JN2DW15SL) At the motor side: Angle plug connector (JN2FW15SL1)
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited

Note 1: The following specifications are recommended for PG shield layers.

Type Braided, shielded wires
(Twisted-pair cable (Outer dia.: Approx. φ10))
Number of cores 14 or more
Dia. of lead 0.2 to 0.3 mm2
Outer dia. of coated cable Max. φ1.5 mm

Note 2: The PKG in contact terminal models denotes that 100 terminals are packed in bulk.
Note 3: Joint with contact terminals should be presoldered.

2-37
2.5 Protective Functions
The table below lists the name of the protective functions, description, alarm codes on the LED monitor, and
presence of alarm output at terminals [30A/B/C]. If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor, remove the
cause of activation of the alarm function referring to Chapter 13 "TROUBLESHOOTING."

LED Related
Class

Name Description monitor function

displays code
If a breakdown of the braking transistor is detected, this protective
function stops the inverter output. (Available for braking transistor
Braking transistor built-in inverters) dba H103
broken
If this alarm is detected, be sure to shut down the power on the primary
side of the inverter.
This function estimates the temperature of the braking resistor and
Braking resistor stops the inverter output if the temperature exceeds the allowable value.
dbh E35 to E37
overheated It is necessary to configure Function codes E35 to E37 depending on
the resistor (integrated or externally mounted).
If a fuse in the main DC circuit blows due to a short circuit in the IGBT
circuit, this protective function displays the error to prevent the
secondary damage. The inverter could be broken, so immediately
DC fuse blown contact your Fuji Electric representative. dcf
(For models of 75 kW or above in 200 V class series and 90 kW or
above in 400 V class series)
Excessive This function is activated when the positioning deviation between the
positioning command and the detected values exceeds "Setting of function code
o18 (Excessive deviation value) x 10" in synchronous operation. d0 o18
deviation
Mounting an option makes 018 effective and displays it on the keypad.
PG
This function is activated if a PG communication error occurs when the
communications ec
17-bit high resolution ABS interface (OPC-VG1-SPGT) is used.
error
This function is activated when the input to either one of EN1 and EN2
ENABLE circuit
Protective functions

is OFF for the duration exceeding 50 ms (which is regarded as a

(safety stop mismatch). The alarm state can be reset only by restarting the inverter. ecf
circuit) failure
(Available soon.)
This function is activated when a ground fault is detected in the inverter
output circuit. If the ground-fault current is large, the overcurrent
protection may be activated.
Ground fault This protective function is to protect the inverter. For the sake of ef H103
prevention of accidents such as human damage and fire, connect a
separate earth-leakage protective relay or an earth-leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB).
This function is activated when a memory error such as a data write
error occurs.
Note: The inverter memory uses a nonvolatile memory that has a
Memory error limited number of rewritable times (100,000 to 1,000,000 times). er1
Saving data with the full save function into the memory so many times
unnecessarily will no longer allow the memory to save data, causing a
memory error.
This function is activated if a communications error occurs between the
keypad and the inverter control circuit when the start/stop command
Keypad given from the keypad is valid (Function code F02=0).
communications Note: Even if a keypad communications error occurs when the inverter er2 F02
error is being driven via the control circuit terminals or the communications
link, the inverter continues running without displaying any alarm or
issuing an alarm output (for any alarm).
CPU error This function is activated if a CPU error occurs. er3
This function is activated: o30, o31,
- if a communications error occurs due to noise when the inverter is H107
Network error being driven via the T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX bus, or CC-Link. er4
E01 to E14
E15 to E28

2-38
 2.5 Protective Functions

Class LED Related

Name Description monitor function
displays code

Chap. 2
This function is activated:
- if an RS-485 communications error occurs when the inverter is H32, H33,
RS-485
being driven via the RS-485 and Function code H32 is set to any of H38
communications er5
"0" through "2."
error H107

SPECIFICATIONS
- if Function code H38 is set within the range of 0.1 to 60.0 (s) and the
communications link breaks for the specified period or longer.
This function is activated:
- if two or more network options (T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX bus, and
CC-Link) are mounted.
- if the SW configuration is the same on two or more PG options.
Operation error (More than one PG option can be mounted.) er6 H01
- if auto tuning (Function code H01) is attempted when any of the
digital input signals BX, STOP1, STOP2 and STOP3 is ON.
- if auto tuning is selected with Function code H01 but the key on
the keypad is not pressed within 20 seconds.
Output wiring This function is activated if the wires in the inverter output circuit are
er7 H01
fault not connected during auto-tuning.
A/D converter This function is activated if an error occurs in the A/D converter circuit.
er8
error
This function is activated if the deviation between the speed command
E43, E44,
(reference speed) and the motor speed (detected or estimated speed)
E45
Speed not agreed becomes excessive. er9
H108,
The detection level and detection time can be specified with function
H149
codes.
UPAC error Available soon era
Inter-inverter This function is activated if a communications error occurs in the
Protective functions

communications inverter-to-inverter communications link using a high-speed serial erb H107

link error communication terminal block (option).
Upon detection of an LSI failure on the printed circuit board, this
Hardware error erh
function stops the inverter output.
H108,
Mock alarm This can be caused with keypad operation or FRENIC-VG Loader. err
H142
This function is activated if a PG data error or PG failure is detected
PG failure when the 17-bit high resolution ABS interface (OPC-VG1-SPGT) is et1
used.
This function protects the inverter when an input phase loss is detected.
Input phase loss If the connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the lin E45
inverter, this function may not detect input phase loss if any.
This function is activated when the reference torque current (F44, F45)
H108,
exceeds the specified level (H140) and the actual speed drops below the
Start delay loc H140,
specified stop speed (F37), and then the state is kept for the specified
H141
duration (H141).
This function is activated when the DC link bus voltage drops below
the undervoltage detection level (180 VDC for 200 V series, 360 VDC
for 400 V series).
Undervoltage lu F14
Note that, if the restart mode after momentary power failure is selected
(F14 = 3, ,4 or 5), no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage
drops.
This function is activated if the thermistor wire breaks when the NTC
thermistor is selected with Function code P30/A31/A131 for motor P30, A31,
NTC wire break M1/M2/M3. nrb A131
error
This function works even at extremely low temperatures (approx. H106
-30°C or below).
This function stops the inverter output when the output current to the
Overcurrent 0c
motor exceeds the overcurrent level of the inverter.
This function is activated if the temperature surrounding the heat sink
Heat sink overheat (that cools down the rectifier diodes and the IGBTs) increases due to 0h1
stopped cooling fans.

2-39
Class LED Related
Name Description monitor function
displays code
This function is activated by digital input signal THR ("Enable external
alarm trip").
Connecting an alarm contact of external equipment such as a braking E01-E14
External alarm 0h2
unit or braking resistor to the control circuit terminal (to which the H106
THR is assigned) activates this function according to the contact signal
status.
This function is activated if the temperature surrounding the control
Inverter internal
printed circuit board increases due to poor ventilation inside the 0h3
overheat
inverter.
This function is activated if the temperature detected by the NTC
Motor overheat thermistor integrated in a dedicated motor for motor temperature 0h4 E30, H106
detection exceeds the motor overheat protection level (E30).
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection
Motor 1 overload if the motor 1 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation 0l1 F11, H106
level specified by Function code F11.
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection
Motor 2 overload if the motor 2 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation 0l2 A33, H106
level specified by Function code A33.
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection
A133,
Motor 3 overload if the motor 3 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation 0l3
H106
level specified by Function code A133.
This function is activated if the output current exceeds the overload
characteristic of the inverse time characteristic.
Inverter overload 0lu F80
It stops the inverter output depending upon the heat sink temperature
and switching element temperature calculated from the output current.
This function detects a break in inverter output wiring during running
H103, P01
Output phase loss and stops the inverter output. 0pl
A01, A101
Protective functions

(Available under vector control for IM with speed sensor.)

This function
Stops the inverter output if the detected speed is 120% or over of the
maximum frequency.
Overspeed 0s H90
This function is activated if the motor speed (detected or estimated
speed) exceeds 120% (adjustable with Function code H90) of the
maximum speed (F03/A06/A106).
This function is activated if the DC link bus voltage exceeds the
overvoltage detection level (405 VDC for 200 V series, 820 VDC for
400 V series) due to an increase of supply voltage or regenerative
Overvoltage braking current from the motor. 0u
Note that the inverter cannot be protected from excessive voltage (high
voltage, for example) supplied by mistake.
This function is activated if a wire breaks in the PA/PB circuit on the
PG terminal or in the power supply circuit.
PG wire break p9 H104
It does not work under vector control without speed sensor or under V/f
control.
This function is activated if the bypass circuit of the DC link bus is not
configured (that is, the magnetic contactor for bypass of the charging
Charger circuit circuit is not closed) even after the main power is applied. pbf
fault
(For models of 37 kW or above in 200 V class series and 75 kW or
above in 400 V class series)
This function is activated if the DC fan is stopped.
DC fan locked (For models of 45 kW or above in 200 V class series and 75 kW or dfa H108
above in 400 V class series)
E-SX bus tact
This error occurs when the E-SX tact cycle and inverter control cycle
synchronization are H108
are out of synchronization with each other.
error
The inverter monitors 2-bit signals of toggle signal 1 TGL1 and toggle
Toggle abnormality signal 2 TGL2 which are sent from the PLC.
arf H107
error When the inverter receives no prescribed change pattern within the
time specified by H144, this error occurs.
2-40
 2.5 Protective Functions

Class LED Related

Name Description monitor function
displays code

Chap. 2
This function displays l-al on the LED monitor if a failure or
warning registered as a light alarm occurs. It outputs the L-ALM signal
on the Y terminal but it does not issue an alarm relay output ([30A],
[30B], [30C]), so the inverter continues to run.

SPECIFICATIONS
Light alarm objects (selectable)
Motor overheat (0h4 ), Motor overload (0l1 to 0l3 ),
NTC wire break error (nrb ), External failure (0h2 ),
RS-485 communications error (er5 ), Network error (er4 ),
Light alarm Toggle abnormality error (arf ), Mock alarm (err ), l-al H106-H111
(warning) DC fan locked (dfa ), Speed mismatch (er9 ),
E-SX bus tact synchronization error (are ), Motor overheat early
warning (m0h ),
Protective functions

Motor overload early warning (m0l ), Lifetime alarm (lif ),

Heat sink overheat early warning (0h ),
Inverter overload early warning (0l ),
Battery life expired (bat ), Start delay (loc ),
Safety PCB light alarm (snf ) (Available soon)
Light alarm objects can be checked on the keypad.
This function protects the inverter against surge voltages which might
appear between one of the power lines, using surge absorbers
Surge protection -
connected to the main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and
control power terminals (R0, T0).
This function monitors the AC input power to the inverter and judges
whether the AC input power (main power) is established.
When the main power is not established, whether to run the inverter or
Main power shut
not can be selected. - H76
down
(When the power is supplied via a PWM converter or the DC link bus,
there is no AC input. In this case, do not change the data of Function
code H76 from the default (H76 = 0).
Notes • All protective functions are automatically reset if the control power voltage decreases until the inverter control circuit no longer
operates.
• The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm information.
• Stoppage due to a protective function can be reset by the RST key on the keypad or turning OFF and then ON between the X terminal
(to which RST is assigned) and the CM. This action is invalid if the cause of an alarm is not removed.
• The inverter cannot reset until the causes of all alarms are removed. (The causes of alarms not removed can be checked on the
keypad.)
• If an abnormal state is categorized as a light alarm, the 30A/B/C does not operate.

2-41
2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions
2.6.1 Connection diagrams
2.6.1.1 Running the MVK type of an induction motor (dedicated motor)

Signal input section

Signal output section

2-42
 2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions

(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device
(RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the
inverter to protect wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended
capacity.

Chap. 2
(Note 2) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the
MCCB or RCD/ELCB, when necessary.
Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3) To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function

SPECIFICATIONS
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power supply lines.
Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4) Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power-factor,
regenerative PWM converter (RHC series).
(Note 5) When connecting an optional DC reactor (DCR), remove the jumper bar from the main circuit terminals P1 and P(+).
Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW come with a DCR as standard. Be sure to connect the
DCR.
Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter
rated capacity, or when there are thyristor-driven loads in the same power supply line.
(Note 6) Inverters of 55 kW or below (200 V class series) and those of 160 kW or below (400 V class series) have a built-in
braking transistor, allowing a braking resistor (DBR) to be directly connected between terminals P(+) and DB.
(Note 7) When connecting an optional braking resistor (DBR) to inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class series) or those of
200 kW or above (400 V class series), be sure to use an optional braking unit (BU) together.
Connect the BU between terminals P(+) and N(-). Auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity, so make connection
as shown in the connection diagram.
(Note 8) A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for suppressing
inverter noise.
(Note 9) For wiring enclosed with , use twisted or shielded wires.
In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by
external induction noise, however, connection to 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) or 0V ([CM], (PGM)) may be effective to
suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or more).
Never install them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set
them at right angles.
(Note 10) The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], transistor
output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], and relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C].
(Note 11) Switching connectors in the main circuits. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.7 "Switching connectors."
(Note 12) Slide switches on the control printed circuit board (control PCB). Use these switches to customize the inverter
operations. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(Note 13) The cooling fan power supply for motors of 7.5 kW or less is single-phase. Connect terminals [FU] and [FV].
For motors of 7.5 kW or less (400 V class series), the power voltage/frequency rating of the cooling fan is 200 V/50
Hz or 200-230 V/60 Hz. For motors of 11 kW or above (400 V class series), it is 400-420 V/50 Hz or 400-440 V/60
Hz. To use the fan with power voltage other than the above specifications, a transformer is necessary.
(Note 14) 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) and 0V ([CM], (PGM)) are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 15) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 16) Jumper bars are mounted between safety terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] by factory default. To use the safety
function, remove the jumper bars before connection of safety devices.

2-43
2.6.1.2 Running the GNF2 type of a permanent magnet synchronous motor
(dedicated motor)

OPC-VG1-PMPG
Signal input section

Signal output section

2-44
 2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions

(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device
(RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the
inverter to protect wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended
capacity.

Chap. 2
(Note 2) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the
MCCB or RCD/ELCB, when necessary.
Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3) To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function

SPECIFICATIONS
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power supply lines.
Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4) Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power-factor,
regenerative PWM converter (RHC series).
(Note 5) When connecting an optional DC reactor (DCR), remove the jumper bar from the main circuit terminals P1 and P(+).
Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW come with a DCR as standard. Be sure to connect the
DCR.
Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter
rated capacity, or when there are thyristor-driven loads in the same power supply line.
(Note 6) Inverters of 55 kW or below (200 V class series) and those of 160 kW or below (400 V class series) have a built-in
braking transistor, allowing a braking resistor (DBR) to be directly connected between terminals P(+) and DB.
(Note 7) When connecting an optional braking resistor (DBR) to inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class series) or those of
200 kW or above (400 V class series), be sure to use an optional braking unit (BU) together.
Connect the BU between terminals P(+) and N(-). Auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity, so make connection
as shown in the connection diagram.
(Note 8) A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for suppressing
inverter noise.
(Note 9) For wiring enclosed with , use twisted or shielded wires.
In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by
external induction noise, however, connection to 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) or 0V ([CM], (PGM)) may be effective to
suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or more).
Never install them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set
them at right angles.
(Note 10) The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], transistor
output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], and relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C].
(Note 11) Switching connectors in the main circuits. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.7 "Switching connectors."
(Note 12) Slide switches on the control printed circuit board (control PCB). Use these switches to customize the inverter
operations. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(Note 13) The cooling fan power supply for motors of 7.5 kW or less is single-phase. Connect terminals [FU] and [FV].
For motors of 7.5 kW or less (400 V class series), the power voltage/frequency rating of the cooling fan is 200 V/50
Hz or 200-230 V/60 Hz. For motors of 11 kW or above (400 V class series), it is 400-420 V/50 Hz or 400-440 V/60
Hz. To use the fan with power voltage other than the above specifications, a transformer is necessary.
(Note 14) 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) and 0V ([CM], (PGM)) are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 15) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 16) Jumper bars are mounted between safety terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] by factory default. To use the safety
function, remove the jumper bars before connection of safety devices.
(Note 17) If the activation of the inverter protective function may result in a high-speed motor rotation due to the load, be sure
to insert an MC.
(Note 18) A single inverter cannot drive two or more PMSMs.
(Note 19) A PMSM (GNF2 type) cannot be driven by commercial power. Driving the PMSM may result in a motor burnout.
(Note 20) Driving a PMSM requires setting the inverter carrier frequency high in order to prevent permanent magnet overheat
and demagnetization due to the output current harmonics (except Fuji GNF2 type). Be sure to check the allowable
carrier frequency of the motor and determine the settings of the carrier frequency (F26) and automatic lowering of the
carrier frequency (H104, Hundreds digit).
When canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency, take care since it derates the continuous rated
current of the inverter according to the carrier frequency setting (F26). (For the rated current derating, refer to Section
2.1.4.)

2-45
2.6.2 List of terminal functions
Main Circuit Terminals and Analog Input Terminals
Classifi-
cation

Symbol Name Functions

L1/R, L2/S, Main circuit power Connect the three-phase input power lines.
L3/T inputs
U, V, W Inverter outputs Connect a three-phase motor.
P (+), P1 DC reactor Connect a DC reactor (DCR) for correcting power factor.
connection HD- and MD-mode inverters: A DCR is provided as an option for inverters of 55 kW or
below, and as standard for those of 75 kW or above.
LD-mode inverters: A DCR is provided as an option for inverters of 45 kW or below, and
as standard for those of 55 kW or above.
P (+), N (-) Braking unit Connect a braking resistor (DBR) via a braking unit.
Main circuit

connection For connection to the DC link bus.

P (+), DB External braking Connect an optional external braking resistor.
resistor connection
G Grounding for Grounding terminals of the inverter.
inverter
R0, T0 Auxiliary power For a backup of the control circuit power supply, connect AC power lines same as that of
input for the control the main power input.
circuit
R1, T1 Auxiliary power For use in combination with a power regenerative PWM converter (RHC series), use
input for the fans these terminals for an auxiliary power input of the AC fans inside the inverter. (For 200 V
class series of inverters with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above)
Normally, no need to use these terminals.
[13] Power supply for the Power supply (+10 VDC, 10 mA max.) for a speed command potentiometer (Variable
potentiometer resistor: 1 to 5kΩ).
Speed setting

[12] Setting voltage input The speed is commanded according to the external analog voltage input.
Reversed operation with ± signals: 0 to ±10V DC/0 to maximum speed
[11] Analog input Common for analog input signals.
common
[Ai1] Analog input 1 Selectable from the following functions to assign. Possible to make setting according to
analog input voltage specified from the external equipment.
0: Input signal off (OFF) 1: Auxiliary speed setting 1 (AUX-N1)
2: Auxiliary speed setting 2 (AUX-N2) 3: Torque limiter (level 1) (TL-REF1)
4: Torque limiter (level 2) (TL-REF2) 5: Torque bias command (TB-REF)
[Ai2] Analog input 2 6: Torque command (T-REF) 7: Torque current command (IT-REF)
8: Creep speed 1 under UP/DOWN control (CRP-N1)
9: Creep speed 2 under UP/DOWN control (CRP-N2)
Analog input

10: Magnetic-flux reference (MF-REF) 11: Line speed detected (LINE-N)

12: Motor temperature (M-TMP) 13: Speed override (N-OR)
14: Universal Ai (U-AI) 15: PID feedback value 1 (PID-FB1)
16: PID command (PID-REF) 17: PID correction gain (PID-G)
18-24: Custom Ai1 to 7 (C-AI 1 to 7)
25: Main speed reference (N-REFV)
26: Current input speed reference (N-REFC)
27: PID feedback value 2 (PID-FB2)
* Ai2 is switchable between voltage input and current input by using the internal switch.
Note that current input supports "speed setting" only.
[M] Analog input Common for analog input signals.
common

2-46
 2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions

Digital Input Terminals

Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions

Chap. 2
[FWD] Run forward FWD-CM: ON
command Run the motor in the forward direction.
Stop command FWD-CM: OFF
Decelerate the motor to stop.

SPECIFICATIONS
[REV] Run reverse REV-CM: ON
command Run the motor in the reverse direction.
Stop command REV-CM: OFF
Decelerate the motor to stop.
[X1] Digital input 1 0, 1, 2, 3: Select multistep speed (1 to 15 steps) (0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8)
4, 5: Select ASR and ACC/DEC time (4 steps) (4: RT1, 5: RT2)
6: Enable 3-wire operation (HLD) 7: Coast to a stop (BX)
[X2] Digital input 2 8: Reset alarm (RST) 9: Enable external alarm trip (THR)
10: Ready for jogging (JOG) 11: Select speed command N2/N1 (N2/N1)
12: Select motor 2 (M-CH2) 13: Select motor 3 (M-CH3)
[X3] Digital input 3 14: Enable DC braking (DCBRK) 15: Clear ACC/DEC to zero (CLR)
16: Switch creep speed under UP/DOWN control (CRP-N2/N1)
17: UP (Increase speed under UP/DOWN control) (UP)
18: DOWN (Decrease speed under UP/DOWN control) (DOWN)
[X4] Digital input 4 19: Enable data change with keypad (WE-KP)
20: Cancel PID control (KP/PID) 21: Switch normal/inverse operation (IVS)
22: Interlock (52-2) (IL)
[X5] Digital input 5 23: Enable data change via communications link (WE-LK)
24: Enable communications link (LE)
25: Universal DI (U-DI)
26: Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting (STM)
[X6] Digital input 6 27: Synchronous operation command (SYC)
28: Lock at zero speed (LOCK) 29: Pre-excitation (EXITE)
30: Cancel speed limiter (N-LIM)
Digital input (Sink/source switchable)

[X7] Digital input 7 31: Cancel H41 (Torque command) (H41-CCL)

32: Cancel H42 (Torque current command) (H42-CCL)
33: Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) (H43-CCL)
34: Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) (F40-CCL)
[X8] Digital input 8
35: Select torque limiter level 2/1 (TL2/TL1)
36: Bypass ACC/DEC processor (BPS)
37, 38: Select torque bias command 1/2 (37: TB1, 38: TB2)
[X9] Digital input 9 39: Select droop control (DROOP) 40: Zero-hold Ai1 (ZH-AI1)
41: Zero-hold Ai2 (ZH-AI2) 42: Zero-hold Ai3 (ZH-AI3)
43: Zero-hold Ai4 (ZH-AI4) 44: Reverse Ai1 polarity (REV-AI1)
45: Reverse Ai2 polarity (REV-AI2) 46: Reverse Ai3 polarity (REV-AI3)
47: Reverse Ai4 polarity (REV-AI4)
48: Inverse PID output (PID-INV)
49: Cancel PG alarm (PG-CCL) 50: Cancel undervoltage alarm (LU-CCL)
51: Hold Ai torque bias (H-TB)
52: STOP1 (Decelerate to stop with normal deceleration time) (STOP1)
53: STOP2 (Decelerate to stop with deceleration time 4) (STOP2)
54: STOP3 (Decelerate to stop with max. braking torque) (STOP3)
55: Latch DIA data (DIA) 56: Latch DIB data (DIB)
57: Cancel multiplex system (MT-CCL)
58-67: Custom Di1-Di10 (C-DI1 to C-DI10)
68: Select load adaptive parameters 2/1 (AN-P1/2) *1
69: Cancel PID components (PID-CCL)
70: Enable PID FF component (PID-FF)
71: Reset completion of speed limit calculation (NL-RST) *1
72: Toggle signal 1 (TGL1) 73: Toggle signal 2 (TGL2)
74: Cause external mock alarm (FTB)
75: Cancel NTC thermistor alarm (NTC-CCL)
76: Cancel lifetime alarm signal (LF-CCL)
77: Request for reading in serial PG absolute position (SPG-AP) *1
78: Switch PID feedback signals (PID-1/2)
79: Select PID torque bias (TB-PID)
80: Tune magnetic position (MP-TUN) *1
81: External electrical conditions (RD) *1
82: Startup conditions (STRD) *1
83: Continue to run at the time of communications link error (LK-D) *1
[PLC] PLC signal power Connect the PLC output signal power supply.
This terminal also supplies power to the load connected to the transistor output terminals.
+24 V (22 to 27 V), 100 mA max.
[CM] Digital input Common terminal for digital input signals.
common

*1 Available soon

2-47
 Classifi-
(Safety function) cation Symbol Name Functions

[EN1], [EN2] Safety function input Opening the circuit between [EN1] and [PS] or [EN2] and [PS] turns off the switching
terminals element of the inverter main circuit, shutting down output.
Digital input

(during authentication)
[PS]

Analog Output Terminals and Transistor Output Terminals

Classifi-
cation

Symbol Name Functions

[Ao1] Analog output 1 Selectable from the following functions to assign. Possible to output monitor signals of 0
to ±10 VDC.
[Ao2] Analog output 2
0: Detected speed (Speedometer, one-way deflection) (N-FB1+)
[Ao3] Analog output 3 1: Detected speed (Speedometer, two-way deflection) (N-FB1±)
2: Speed setting 2 (Before acceleration/deceleration calculation) (N-REF2)
3: Speed setting 4 (ASR input) (N-REF4)
4: Detected speed (N-FB2±) 5: Detected line speed (LINE-N±)
6: Torque current command (Torque ammeter, two-way deflection) (IT-REF±)
Analog output

7: Torque current command (Torque ammeter, one-way deflection) (IT-REF+)

8: Torque command (Torque meter, two-way deflection) (T-REF±)
9: Torque command (Torque meter, one-way deflection) (T-REF+)
10: Motor current rms value (I-AC) 11: Motor voltage rms value (V-AC)
12: Input power (PWR) 13: DC link circuit voltage (V-DC)
14: +10V output test (P10) 15: -10V output test (N10)
30: Universal AO (U-AO)
31-37: Custom Ao1 to Ao7 (C-AO1 to C-AO7)
38: Input power (PWR-IN) 39: Magnetic pole position signal (SMP)
40: PID output value (PID-OUT)
[M] Analog output Common terminal for analog output signals.
common
[Y1] Transistor Possible to output a signal selected from the following functions.
output 1 0: Inverter running (RUN) 1: Speed existence (N-EX)
[Y2] Transistor 2: Speed agreement (N-AG1) 3: Speed arrival signal (N-AR)
output 2 4, 5, 6: Detected speed 1/2/3 (4: N-DT1 5: N-DT2 6: N-DT3)
7: Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) (LU)
[Y3] Transistor 8: Torque polarity detected (B/D)
output 3 9: Torque limiting (TL)
[Y4] Transistor 10, 11: Detected torque 1/2 (10: T-DT1, 11: T-DT2)
output 4 12: Keypad operation enabled (KP) 13: Inverter stopped (STOP)
14: Inverter ready to run (RDY) 15: Magnetic-flux detected (MF-DT)
16: Motor M2 selected (SW-M2) 17: Motor M3 selected (SW-M3)
18: Brake release signal (BRK) 19: Alarm content 1 (AL1)
20: Alarm content 2 (AL2) 21: Alarm content 3 (AL4)
22: Alarm content 4 (AL8) 23: Cooling fan in operation (FAN)
24: Resetting (TRY) 25: Universal DO (U-DO)
26: Heat sink overheat early warning (INV-OH)
Transistor output

27: Synchronization completion signal (SY-C)

28: Lifetime alarm (LIFE)
29: Under acceleration (U-ACC)
30: Under deceleration (U-DEC)
31: Inverter overload early warring (INV-OL)
32: Motor overheat early warring (M-OH)
33: Motor overload early warring (M-OL)
34: DB overload early warring (DB-OL)
35: Link transmission error (LK-ERR)
36: In limiting under load adaptive control (ANL)
37: In calculation under load adaptive control (ANC)
38: Analog torque bias being held (TBH)
39-48: Custom Do1-Do10 (C-DO1 to C-DO10)
50: Z-phase detection completed (Z-RDY) *1
51: Multiplex system communications link being established (MTS)
52: Answerback to cancellation of multiplex system (MEC-AB)
53: Multiplex system master selected (MSS)
54: Multiplex system local station failure (AL-SF)
55: Stopped due to communications link error (LES) *1
56: Alarm output (for any alarm) (ALM)
57: Light alarm (L-ALM) 58: Maintenance timer (MNT)
59: Braking transistor broken (DBAL) 60: DC fan locked (DCFL)

*1 Available soon

2-48
 2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions

Classifi-
cation Symbol Name Functions

[Y4] Transistor 61: Speed agreement 2 (N-AG2) 62: Speed agreement 3 (N-AG3)

Chap. 2
output 4 63: Axial fan stopped (MFAN)
64: Answerback to toggle signal 1 (TGL1-AB)
65: Answerback to toggle signal 2 (TGL2-AB)
66: Answerback to droop control enabled (DSAB)
67: Answerback to cancellation of torque command/torque current command (TCL-C)

SPECIFICATIONS
68: Answerback to cancellation of torque limiter mode 1 (F40-AB)
71: 73 ON command (PRT-73)
72: Turn ON Y-terminal test output (Y-ON)
Transistor output

73: Turn OFF Y-terminal test output (Y-OFF)

74: Reading absolute position of serial PG in progress (SPG-RD) *1
75: System clock battery lifetime expired (BATT)
76: Magnetic position tuning in progress (TUN-MG) *1
77: SPGT battery warning (SPGT-B) *1
78: Electrical conditions ready (ERD) *1
79: IT detected in operation (TCA) *1
80: EN terminal detection circuit failure (DECF) *1
81: EN terminal OFF (ENOFF) *1
82: Safety function in progress (SF-RUN) *1
83: Motor stopped by safety function (SF-STP) *1
84: STO under testing by safety function (SF-TST) *1
[CMY] Transistor output Common terminal for transistor output signals.
common
[Y5A], Relay output Same signals as listed in [Y1] to [Y4] are selectable.
Relay output

[Y5C]
[30A], [30B], Alarm relay output Outputs a no-voltage contact signal (1C) when the protective function has been activated
[30C] to stop the motor.
Switchable whether excitation or non-excitation outputs an alarm.
[DX＋], RS-485 Input/output terminals for RS-485 communication.
Communication

[DX-] communication Multi-drop connection enables up to 31 inverters to connect to one host equipment.
input/output
Half-duplex mode.
USB USB port Accessible from the front of the inverter.
connector USB connector: mini B, USB 2.0 Full Speed
[PA], [PB] Pulse generator Connection of 2-phase signals sent from a pulse generator.
2-phase signal input
[PGP], Pulse generator Power supply (+15 VDC, switchable to +12 VDC) to a PG.
Speed detection

[PGM] power supply

[FA], [FB] Pulse generator Outputs frequency-divided (programmable with Function code E29), pulse generator
output signals.
Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage on the
[PGP] terminal) transistor outputs.
[CM] Pulse generator A common terminal for [FA] and [FB].
output common
[TH1], NTC/PTC thermistor Monitor of the motor temperature with NTC or PTC thermistor.
Temperature

[THC] connection For a PTC thermistor, the motor overheat protection level can be specified with Function
detection

code E32.

*1 Available soon

2-49
 FRENIC- VG
3
Chapter 3
PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

This chapter describes the operating and storage environments, installation and wiring, typical connection
diagram, names and functions of keypad components, keypad operation, and test run procedure.

Contents

3.1 Before Use .................................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 Acceptance inspection (Nameplates and type of inverter) .................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 External view and terminal blocks ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Installation environment...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Storage environment ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 Wiring precautions .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment........................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Noise reduction ................................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.2.6 Leakage current................................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.2.7 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)........................................ 3-12
3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter............................................................................................................. 3-13
3.3.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Installing the Inverter ........................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.3.3 Wiring ............................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3.3.1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide ................................................. 3-16
3.3.3.2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes ................................................................... 3-17
3.3.3.3 Arrangement of terminals.......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.3.4 Wiring precautions .................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3.5 Connection diagram .................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3.6 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals...................................... 3-27
3.3.3.7 Switching connectors ................................................................................................................ 3-31
3.3.3.8 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals .......................................................................... 3-34
3.3.3.9 Setting up the slide switches ..................................................................................................... 3-42
3.3.4 Mounting and connecting a keypad................................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.1 Parts required for connection .................................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.2 Mounting procedure .................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.5 USB connectivity .............................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.4 Operation Using the Keypad..................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.1 Names and functions of keypad components .................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.2 Overview of operation modes ........................................................................................................... 3-52
3.4.3 Running mode ................................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.4.3.1 Configuring the speed command............................................................................................... 3-53
 3.4.3.2 Running or stopping the motor.................................................................................................. 3-54
3.4.3.3 Monitoring the running status on the LED monitor .................................................................. 3-56
3.4.3.4 Jogging (inching) the motor ...................................................................................................... 3-57
3.4.3.5 Monitoring light alarms............................................................................................................. 3-58
3.4.4 Programming mode........................................................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.4.1 Selecting language -- Menu #0 "LANGUAGE" ....................................................................... 3-66
3.4.4.2 Configuring function codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET".............................................................. 3-67
3.4.4.3 Checking function code data -- Menu #2 "DATA CHECK"...................................................... 3-69
3.4.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" ........................................................ 3-71
3.4.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O CHECK".............................................................. 3-74
3.4.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" ........................................ 3-77
3.4.4.7 Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR"................................................................... 3-79
3.4.4.8 Reading alarm information -- Menu #7 "ALM INF" ................................................................ 3-80
3.4.4.9 Viewing causes of alarm -- Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE".............................................................. 3-83
3.4.4.10 Copying data -- Menu #10 "DATA COPY"............................................................................... 3-84
3.4.4.11 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #11 "CHANGES" ................................................. 3-86
3.4.4.12 Setting the calendar clock -- Menu #12 "DATE/TIME"............................................................ 3-87
3.4.4.13 Limiting function codes to be displayed -- Menu #14 "LIMITED FC" .................................... 3-90
3.5 Test Run Procedure ................................................................................................................................... 3-91
3.5.1 Checking prior to powering On......................................................................................................... 3-92
3.5.2 Powering ON and checking............................................................................................................... 3-93
3.5.2.1 Checking the input state of PG (pulse generator) signals.......................................................... 3-93
3.5.2.2 Mounting direction of a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals .................................................. 3-94
3.5.3 Selecting a desired motor drive control............................................................................................. 3-95
3.5.3.1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor ................................................................................... 3-95
3.5.3.2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor .............................................................................. 3-97
3.5.3.3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor...................... 3-99
3.5.3.4 V/f control for IM.................................................................................................................... 3-101
3.5.4 Running the inverter for operation check........................................................................................ 3-103
3.5.4.1 Test run procedure for induction motor (IM) .......................................................................... 3-103
3.5.4.2 Test run procedure for permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) ................................ 3-104
3.5.5 Selecting a speed command source ................................................................................................. 3-106
3.5.5.1 Setting up a speed command from the keypad ........................................................................ 3-106
3.5.5.2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer ................................................. 3-106
3.5.5.3 Setting up a speed command with multistep speed selection .................................................. 3-107
3.5.6 Selecting a run command source..................................................................................................... 3-108
3.5.6.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad............................................................................ 3-108
3.5.6.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and [REV]) ............. 3-108
 3.1 Before Use

3.1 Before Use

3.1.1 Acceptance inspection (Nameplates and type of inverter)
Unpack the package and check the following:
(1) An inverter and the following accessories are contained.

Chap. 3
Accessories - DC reactor (DCR)
(for inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW)
- Instruction manual

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

- CD-ROM (containing the FRENIC-VG User's Manual, FRENIC-VG Loader
software (free version), and FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual)
(2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts
missing.
(3) The inverter is the type you ordered. You can check the type and specifications on the main and
sub nameplates. (The main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter as shown in Figure
3.1-2.) For inverters of 30 kW or above, the mass is printed on the main nameplate.

(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate

Figure 3.1-1 Nameplates

TYPE: Type of inverter

In this manual, inverter types are denoted as "FRN_ _ _VG1†-2†/4†."

3-1
The FRENIC-VG is available in two or three drive modes depending upon the inverter capacity: High
Duty (HD) and Low Duty (LD) modes or High Duty (HD), Medium Duty (MD) and Low Duty (LD)
modes. One of these modes should be selected to match the load property of your system.
Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate.
High Duty: HD mode designed for heavy duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min, 200% for 3 s. Continuous ratings = Inverter
ratings
Medium Duty: MD mode designed for medium duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min. Continuous ratings = One rank higher capacity
of inverters
Low Duty: LD mode designed for light duty load applications.
Overload capability: 120% for 1 min. Continuous ratings = One rank or two ranks
higher capacity of inverters
SOURCE: Number of input phases (three-phase: 3PH), input voltage, input frequency, input
current
OUTPUT: Number of output phases, rated output voltage, output frequency range, rated output
capacity, rated output current, and overload capability
SCCR: Short-circuit capacity
MASS: Mass of the inverter in kilogram (for 30 kW or above)
SER. No.: Product number
28A123A0579E
Serial number of production lot
Production month
1 to 9: January to September
X, Y, or Z: October, November, or December
Production year: Last digit of year

If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product,
contact your Fuji Electric representative.

3-2
 3.1 Before Use

3.1.2 External view and terminal blocks

(1) Outside and inside views

Control circuit terminal block

Chap. 3
Wiring guide

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Main circuit terminal
block
Sub nameplate
Front cover Front cover
mounting screw

(a) FRN7.5VG1†-2†

(b) FRN220VG1†-4†

Figure 3.1-2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters

3-3
(2) Warning plates and label

(a) FRN7.5VG1†-2† (b) FRN220VG1†-4†

Figure 3.1-3 Warning Plates and Label

3-4
 3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters

3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters

This section provides precautions in introducing inverters, e.g. precautions for installation
environment, power supply lines, wiring, and connection to peripheral equipment. Be sure to observe
those precautions.

Chap. 3
3.2.1 Installation environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Chapter 2, Section 2.2
"Common Specifications."

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Fuji Electric strongly recommends installing inverters in a panel for safety reasons, in particular, when
installing the ones whose enclosure rating is IP00.
When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements, it is necessary
to derate the inverter or consider the panel engineering design suitable for the special environment or
the panel installation location. For details, refer to the Fuji Electric technical information "Engineering
Design of Panels" or consult your Fuji Electric representative.
The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the
panel installation location.
Environments Possible problems Sample measures Applications
Highly concentrated Corrosive gases cause parts Any of the following measures may Paper manufacturing,
sulfidizing gas or inside the inverter to corrode, be necessary. sewage disposal, sludge
other corrosive gases resulting in an inverter - Mount the inverter in a sealed treatment, tire
malfunction. panel with IP6X or air-purge manufacturing, gypsum
mechanism. manufacturing, metal
processing, and a
- Place the panel in a room free from particular process in textile
influence of the gases. factories.
A lot of conductive Entry of conductive dust into Any of the following measures may Wiredrawing machines,
dust or foreign the inverter causes a short be necessary. metal processing,
material (e.g., metal circuit. - Mount the inverter in a sealed extruding machines,
powders or shavings, panel. printing presses,
carbon fibers, or combustors, and industrial
carbon dust) - Place the panel in a room free from waste treatment.
influence of the conductive dust.
A lot of fibrous or Fibrous or paper dust Any of the following measures may Textile manufacturing and
paper dust accumulated on the heat sink be necessary. paper manufacturing.
lowers the cooing effect. - Mount the inverter in a sealed
Entry of dust into the inverter panel that shuts out dust.
causes the electronic circuitry - Ensure a maintenance space for
to malfunction. periodical cleaning of the heat sink
in panel engineering design.
- Employ external cooling when
mounting the inverter in a panel for
easy maintenance and perform
periodical maintenance.
High humidity or In an environment where a - Put a heating module such as a Outdoor installation.
dew condensation humidifier is used or where space heater in the panel. Film manufacturing line,
the air conditioner is not pumps and food
equipped with a dehumidifier, processing.
high humidity or dew
condensation results, which
causes a short-circuiting or
malfunction of electronic
circuitry inside the inverter.
Vibration or shock If a large vibration or shock - Insert shock-absorbing materials Installation of an inverter
exceeding the exceeding the specified level between the mounting base of the panel on a carrier or
specified level is applied to the inverter, for inverter and the panel for safe self-propelled machine.
example, due to a carrier mounting. Ventilating fan at a
running on seam joints of rails construction site or a press
or blasting at a construction machine.
site, the inverter structure gets
damaged.
Fumigation for Halogen compounds such as - When exporting an inverter built in Exporting.
export packaging methyl bromide used in a panel or equipment, pack them in
fumigation corrodes some a previously fumigated wooden
parts inside the inverter. crate.
- When packing an inverter alone for
export, use a laminated veneer
lumber (LVL).

3-5
3.2.2 Storage environment
The storage environment in which the inverter should be stored after purchase differs from the
installation environment. Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed
below.

[ 1 ] Temporary storage
Table 3.2-1 Storage and Transport Environments

Item Specifications
Storage temperature *1 -25 to +70°C Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or
Relative humidity 5 to 95% *2 condensation or freezing

Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases, oil mist,
vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt. (0.01
mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)

*1 Assuming comparatively short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to
sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.

Precautions for temporary storage

(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table 3.2-1, wrap the
inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in a high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica
gel) in the airtight package described in (2) above.

[ 2 ] Long-term storage
The long-term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the
storage site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the surrounding temperature range should be
within the range from -10 to 30°C. This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deterioration.
(2) The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture. Add a drying agent inside the
package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be
subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the
environment specified in Table 3.2-1.

Precautions for storage over 1 year

If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes.
Do not connect the inverters to the load circuit (secondary side) or run the inverter.

3-6
 3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters

3.2.3 Wiring precautions

(1) Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
(2) Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main
circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).

Chap. 3
(3) If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should be the
sum of the length of the wires to the motors.
(4) Precautions for high frequency leakage currents

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

If the wiring distance between an inverter and a motor is long, high frequency currents flowing
through stray capacitance across wires of phases may cause an inverter overheat, overcurrent trip,
increase of leakage current, or it may not assure the accuracy in measuring leakage current.
Depending on the operating condition, an excessive leakage current may damage the inverter.
To avoid the above problems when directly connecting an inverter to a motor, keep the wiring
distance 50 m or less for inverters with a capacity of 3.7 kW or below, and 100 m or less for
inverters with a higher capacity.
If the wiring distance longer than the specified above is required, lower the carrier frequency or
insert an output circuit filter (OFL-†††-†A) as shown below.
When a single inverter drives two or more motors connected in parallel (group drive), in
particular, using shielded wires, the stray capacitance to the earth is large, so lower the carrier
frequency or insert an output circuit filter (OFL-†††-†A).

No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed

Power Power Max. 5 m

input input Output circuit filter

Inverter Motor Inverter Motor

Max. 50 m
Max. 100 m Max. 400 m

For an inverter with an output circuit filter installed, the total secondary wiring length should be
100 m or less (400 m or less under the V/f control).
If further longer secondary wiring is required, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
(5) Precautions for surge voltage in driving a motor by an inverter (especially for 400 V class
motors)
If the motor is driven by a PWM-type inverter, surge voltage generated by switching the inverter
component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor
terminals. Particularly if the wiring length is long, the surge voltage may deteriorate the
insulation resistance of the motor. Implement any of the following measures.
- Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage. (All Fuji standard motors feature
reinforced insulation.)
- Connect a surge suppressor unit (SSU50/100TA-NS) at the motor terminal.
- Connect an output circuit filter (OFL-†††-†A) to the output terminals (secondary circuits)
of the inverter.
- Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor (10 to 20 m or less).
(6) When an output circuit filter is inserted in the secondary circuit or the wiring between the
inverter and the motor is long, a voltage loss occurs due to reactance of the filter or wiring so that
the insufficient voltage may cause output current oscillation or a lack of motor output torque.

3-7
3.2.4 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment
(1) Phase-advancing capacitors for power factor correction
Do not mount a phase-advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter's input
(primary) or output (secondary) circuit. Mounting it in the input (primary) circuit takes no effect.
To correct the inverter power factor, use an optional DC reactor (DCR). Mounting it in the output
(secondary) circuit causes an overcurrent trip, disabling operation.
An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is
assumed to be due to surge current generated by open/close of phase-advancing capacitors in the
power system. An optional DC/AC reactor (DCR/ACR) is recommended as a measure to be
taken at the inverter side.
Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and
phase-advancing capacitors on the same power supply line. If the harmonic component causes
any problems, connect an optional DCR/ACR to the inverter. In some cases, it is necessary to
insert a reactor in series with the phase-advancing capacitors.
(2) Power supply lines (Application of a DC/AC reactor)
Use an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500
kVA or more and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are
thyristor-driven loads. If no DCR is used, the percentage-reactance of the power supply
decreases, and harmonic components and their peak levels increase. These factors may break
rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the
capacitors.
If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2% to 3%, use an optional DCR/ACR.
Max voltage (V) - Min voltage (V)
Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800- 3)
Three - phase average voltage (V)
(3) Optional DCR for correcting the inverter input power factor (for suppressing harmonics)
To correct the inverter input power factor (to suppress harmonics), use an optional DCR. Using a
DCR increases the reactance of inverter’s power source so as to decrease harmonic components
on the power source lines and correct the power factor of the inverter.

DCR models Input power factor Remarks

The last letter identifies the capacitance.
These DCR models comply with "Standard Specifications for
Public Building Construction" (Electric Equipment, 2010
version) supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure,
DCR2/4-††/††A/††B Approx. 90% to 95%
Transport and Tourism.
(The input power factor is 94% or above when the power
factor of the fundamental harmonic is assumed as "1"
according to the 2010 version.)
Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor of 37 kW or
DCR2/4-††C Approx. 86% to 90%
above.

• Select a DCR matching not the inverter capacity but the nominal applied motor capacity.
Applicable reactor models differ depending upon the selected HD, MD, or LD mode even
on the same type of inverters.
• Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW are provided together with a
DCR as standard. Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter.

(4) PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor
Using a PWM converter (High power-factor, regenerative PWM converter, RHC series) corrects
the inverter power factor up to nearly "1." When combining an inverter with a PWM converter,
disable the main power down detection by setting the function code H76 to "0" (default). If the
main power down detection is enabled (H76 = 1), the inverter interprets the main power as being
shut down, ignoring an entry of a run command.

3-8
 3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters

(5) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
Install a recommended MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the primary
circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring. Since using an MCCB or RCD/ELCB with a lager
capacity than recommended ones breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system,
be sure to select recommended ones. Also select ones with short-circuit breaking capacity
suitable for the power source impedance.

Chap. 3
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) and
Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Nominal Rated current of MCCB and
Power supply HD/MD/LD RCD/ELCB (A)
applied motor Inverter type
voltage mode
(kW) w/ DCR w/o DCR
0.75 FRN0.75VG1†-2† HD 5 10
1.5 FRN1.5VG1†-2† HD 15
10
2.2 FRN2.2VG1†-2† HD 20
3.7 FRN3.7VG1†-2† HD 20 30
5.5 FRN5.5VG1†-2† HD 30 50
7.5 FRN7.5VG1†-2† HD 40 75
11 FRN11VG1†-2† HD 50 100
15 FRN15VG1†-2† HD 75 125
18.5 FRN18.5VG1†-2† HD 150
100
22 FRN22VG1†-2† HD 175
Three-phase 30 HD 150 200
FRN30VG1†-2†
200 V LD
37 175 250
HD
FRN37VG1†-2†
LD
45 200 300
HD
FRN45VG1†-2†
LD
55 250 350
HD
FRN55VG1†-2†
LD
75 350
HD
FRN75VG1†-2†
LD -
90 400
HD
FRN90VG1†-2†
110 LD 350

3-9
 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) and
Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) (continued)

Nominal Rated current of MCCB and

Power supply HD/MD/LD RCD/ELCB (A)
applied motor Inverter type
voltage mode
(kW) w/ DCR w/o DCR
3.7 FRN3.7VG1†-4† HD 10 20
5.5 FRN5.5VG1†-4† HD 15 30
7.5 FRN7.5VG1†-4† HD 20 40
11 FRN11VG1†-4† HD 30 50
15 FRN15VG1†-4† HD 60
40
18.5 FRN18.5VG1†-4† HD 75
22 FRN22VG1†-4† HD 50 100
30 HD 75
FRN30VG1†-4†
LD 125
37
HD
FRN37VG1†-4† 100
LD
45 150
HD
FRN45VG1†-4†
LD
55 125 200
HD
FRN55VG1†-4†
LD
75 175
HD
FRN75VG1†-4†
LD
90 200
HD
FRN90VG1†-4†
MD/LD
110 250
HD
FRN110VG1†-4†
MD/LD
132 300
HD
FRN132VG1†-4†
Three-phase MD/LD
160 350
400 V HD
FRN160VG1†-4†
MD/LD
200
HD
FRN200VG1†-4† 500
MD/LD
220
HD
250 FRN220VG1†-4† MD
LD 600
280 -
HD
FRN280VG1†-4†
MD
315
FRN315VG1†-4† HD
FRN280VG1†-4† LD 800
355 FRN315VG1†-4† MD
FRN355VG1†-4† HD
FRN315VG1†-4† LD
400 FRN355VG1†-4† MD
FRN400VG1†-4† HD
FRN355VG1†-4† LD 1200
450
MD
FRN400VG1†-4†
LD
500
HD
FRN500VG1†-4†
LD
630 1400
HD
FRN630VG1†-4†
710 LD 1600

3-10
 3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters

If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in the
upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to
factory operation, install a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.

Chap. 3
(6) Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input (primary) circuit
Avoid frequent ON/OFF operation of the magnetic contactor (MC) in the input circuit; otherwise,

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

the inverter failure may result. If frequent start/stop of the motor is required, use FWD/REV
terminal signals or the / / keys on the inverter's keypad.
The frequency of the MC's ON/OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes. To assure
10-year or longer service life of the inverter, it should not be more than once per hour.
• From the system's safety point of view, it is recommended to employ such a sequence that
shuts down the magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output
signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals. The sequence minimizes
the secondary damage even if the inverter breaks.
When the sequence is employed, connecting the MC's primary power line to the inverter's
auxiliary control power input makes it possible to monitor the inverter's alarm status on the
keypad.
• The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may
trigger that of the inverter's internal parts (e.g., charging resistor). To avoid such a
breakdown linkage, introduce an MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if
a DC link voltage establishment signal is not issued within three seconds after the MC is
switched on.
For the braking transistor built-in type of inverters, assign a transistor error output signal
DBAL on inverter's programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input
circuit.

(7) Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter output (secondary) circuit

If a magnetic contactor (MC) is inserted in the inverter's output (secondary) circuit for switching
the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes, it should be switched on and off
when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped. This prevents the contact point from
getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC. The MC should not be equipped with any main
circuit surge killer.
Applying a commercial power to the inverter's output circuit breaks the inverter. To avoid it,
interlock the MC on the motor's commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit
so that they are not switched ON at the same time.
(8) Surge absorber/surge killer
Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter's output (secondary) lines.

3-11
3.2.5 Noise reduction
If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices, or that generated from peripheral equipment
causes the inverter to malfunction, follow the basic measures outlined below.
(1) If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding
wires:
- Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other devices.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
- Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter with an insulated
transformer.
- Decrease the inverter's carrier frequency (F26). (See Note below.)
(2) If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices:
- Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires.
- Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe, and connect the pipe to the ground
near the inverter.
- Install the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter's power wires.
- Decrease the inverter's carrier frequency (F26). (See Note below.)
(3) When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment:
- For inverter's control signal wires, use twisted or shielded-twisted wires. When using
shielded-twisted wires, connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of
the control circuit.
- Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor's coils or other solenoids (if any).
Note Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) at a low carrier frequency may heat
the permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in demagnetization. When
decreasing the carrier frequency setting, be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor.

3.2.6 Leakage current

A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)
switching on/off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter
input and output wires or a motor. If any of the problems listed below occurs, take an appropriate
measure against them.
Problem Measures
An earth leakage circuit 1) Decrease the carrier frequency. (See Note given in Section 3.2.5 above.)
breaker* that is connected to 2) Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter.
the input (primary) side has 3) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker with lower sensitivity than the one currently used.
tripped.
4) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency
*With overcurrent protection current component (Fuji SG and EG series).
An external thermal relay was 1) Decrease the carrier frequency. (See Note given in Section 3.2.5 above.)
falsely activated. 2) Increase the current setting of the thermal relay.
3) Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter, instead of the external
thermal relay.

3.2.7 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous

motor (PMSM)
When using a PMSM, note the following.
• When using a PMSM other than the Fuji standard synchronous motor (GNF2), consult your Fuji
Electric representative.
• A single inverter cannot drive two or more PMSMs.
• A PMSM cannot be driven by commercial power.

3-12
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3.1 Operating environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 3.3-1.
Table 3.3-1 Environmental Requirements

Chap. 3
Item Specifications
Site location Indoors
Surrounding temperature -10 to +50°C (Note 1)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Relative humidity 5 to 95% (No condensation)
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil
mist, vapor or water drops.
Pollution degree 2 (IEC60664-1) (Note 2)
The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation
to form.
Altitude 1,000 m max. (Note 3)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa
Vibration 55 kW or below (200 V class series) 75 kW or above (200 V class series)
75 kW or below (400 V class series) 90 kW or above (400 V class series)
3 mm (Max. amplitude) 2 to less than 9 Hz 3 mm (Max. amplitude) 2 to less than 9 Hz
9.8 m/s2 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m/s2 9 to less than 55 Hz
2 m/s2 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz
1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz

(Note 1) When inverters are mounted side-by-side without any clearance between them (22 kW or below), the surrounding
temperature should be within the range from -10 to +40°C.
(Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint, cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which
will clog the heat sink of the inverter. If the inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in a dustproof
panel of your system.
(Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m, you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in
Table 3.3-2.

Table 3.3-2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude

Altitude Output current derating factor

1000 m or lower 1.00
1000 to 1500 m 0.97
1500 to 2000 m 0.95
2000 to 2500 m 0.91
2500 to 3000 m 0.88

3-13
3.3.2 Installing the Inverter
(1) Mounting base
Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.
Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally.

Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

Otherwise, a fire could occur.

(2) Clearances
Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 3.3-1 and Table 3.3-3
are maintained at all times. When mounting the inverter in the panel of your
system, take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the surrounding
temperature easily rises. Do not mount the inverter in a small panel with poor
ventilation.

„ When mounting two or more inverters

When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel, basically lay
them out side by side. When mounting them necessarily one above the other,
be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat Figure 3.3-1
radiating from an inverter will not affect the one/s above. Mounting Direction and
Required Clearances
As long as the surrounding temperature is 40°C or lower, inverters with a
capacity of 22 kW or below can be mounted side by side without any
clearance between them.
Table 3.3-3 Clearances (mm)
Inverter capacity A B C
0.75 to 22 kW 20 0
100
30 to 220 kW 100
50
280 to 630 kW 150 150
C: Space required in front of the inverter unit

„ When employing external cooling

In external cooling, the heat sink, which dissipates about 70% of the total heat
(total loss) generated into air, is situated outside the equipment or the panel.
The external cooling, therefore, significantly reduces heat radiating inside the
equipment or panel.
To employ external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below,
use the mounting adapter for external cooling (option); for those with a
capacity of 30 kW or above, simply change the positions of the mounting
bases.
For the dimensional outline drawing of the mounting adapter (option), refer to
Chapter 8, Section 8.5.8. Figure 3.3-2 External Cooling

Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign
materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
Otherwise, a fire or accident could occur.

3-14
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above, change the positions of the
top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as shown below (Figure
3.3-3).
Screws differ in size and count for each inverter. Refer to the table below.
For the panel cutting size, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3 "External Dimensions."
Table 3.3-4 Screw Size, Count and Tightening Torque

Chap. 3
Tightening
Base fixing screw Case fixing screw
Inverter type torque
(Screw size and q'ty) (Screw size and q'ty)
(N·m)
M6 × 20

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

FRN30VG1†-2†/FRN37VG1†-2† M6 × 20
5 pcs for upper side, 5.8
FRN30VG1†-4† to FRN55VG1†-4† 2 pcs for upper side
3 pcs for lower side
FRN45VG1†-2†/FRN55VG1†-2† M6 × 20 M6 × 12
FRN75VG1†-4† 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 pcs for upper side 5.8

FRN75VG1†-2† M5 ×12 M5 × 12
FRN90VG1†-4†/FRN110VG1†-4† 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side 3.5

M5 × 16 M5 × 16
FRN132VG1†-4†/FRN160VG1†-4† 3.5
7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side
FRN90VG1†-2† M5 × 16 M5 × 16
FRN200VG1†-4†/FRN220VG1†-4† 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs for upper side 3.5

M5 × 16 M5 × 16
FRN280VG1†-4†/FRN315VG1†-4† 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3.5
FRN355VG1†-4†/FRN400VG1†-4† M6 × 20 M6 × 20
6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 5.8

M8 × 20 M8 × 20
FRN500VG1†-4†/FRN630VG1†-4† 13.5
8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides

1) Remove all of the base fixing screws and the case fixing screws from the top of the inverter.
2) Move the top mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it to the case fixing screw holes
with the base fixing screws. (After changing the position of the top mounting base, some screws
may be left unused.)
3) Remove the base fixing screws from the bottom of the inverter, move the bottom mounting base to
the center of the inverter, and secure it with the base fixing screws, just as in step 2). (Inverters with
a capacity of 220 kW or below have no case fixing screws on the bottom.)

Figure 3.3-3 Changing the Positions of the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases

When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases, use only the specified screws.
Otherwise, a fire or accident could occur.

3-15
3.3.3 Wiring
Follow the procedure below. (In the following description, the inverter has already been installed.)
In tables given in this manual, inverter types are denoted as "FRN_ _ _VG1†-2†/4†.

3.3.3.1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide

Be sure to disconnect the USB cable from the USB connector before removing the front cover.
Otherwise, a fire or accident could occur.

(1) For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below

First loosen the front cover fixing screw, hold the cover with both hands, slide it downward, tilt it
toward you, and then pull it upward, as shown below.
While pressing the wiring guide upward, pull it out toward you.
After carrying out wiring, put the wiring guide and the front cover back into place in the reverse
order of removal.

Figure 3.3-4 Removing the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide (FRN11VG1†-2†)

(2) For inverters with a capacity of 30 to 630 kW

Loosen the four front cover fixing screws, hold the cover with both hands, slide it upward slightly,
and pull it toward you, as shown below.
After carrying out wiring, align the screw holes provided in the front cover with the screws on the
inverter case, then put the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal.
To expose the control printed circuit board (control PCB), open the keypad enclosure.

Tightening torque: 1.8 N•m (M4)

3.5 N•m (M5)
Figure 3.3-5 Removing the Front Cover (FRN30VG1†-2†)

3-16
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3.3.2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes

(1) Main circuit terminals
The tables and figures given below show the screw specifications and wire sizes. Note that the
terminal arrangements differ depending on the inverter types. In each of the figures, two grounding
terminals ( G) are not exclusive to the power supply wiring (primary circuit) or motor wiring
(secondary circuit).

Chap. 3
Use crimp terminals covered with an insulation sheath or with an insulation tube. The recommended
wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using a single HIV wire (for 75°C) at a surrounding
temperature of 50°C.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Table 3.3-5 Screw Specifications
Inverter type Screw specifications
Auxiliary control Auxiliary fan
Main circuit power input power input
Grounding terminals terminals terminals
Refer to terminals
[R0, T0] [R1, T1]
Three-phase Three-phase Section
200 V 400 V 3.3.3.3. Screw Screw
size Tightening size Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Screw
(Screw- torque (Screw- torque torque torque
size size
driver (N·m) driver (N·m) (N·m) (N·m)
size) size)
FRN0.75VG1†-2† FRN0.75VG1†-4†
FRN1.5VG1†-2† FRN1.5VG1†-4†
FRN2.2VG1†-2† FRN2.2VG1†-4† M5 M5
Figure A 3.5 3.5
FRN3.7VG1†-2† FRN3.7VG1†-4† (No. 2) (No. 2)
FRN5.5VG1†-2† FRN5.5VG1†-4†
FRN7.5G1†-2† FRN7.5VG1†-4†
FRN11VG1†-2† FRN11VG1†-4†
-- --
FRN15VG1†-2† FRN15VG1†-4† M6 M6
Figure B 5.8 5.8
FRN18.5VG1†-2† FRN18.5VG1†4† (No. 3) (No. 3)
FRN22VG1†-2† FRN22VG1†-4†
FRN30VG1†-4†
FRN37VG1†-4†
FRN30VG1†-2† Figure C M8 13.5
FRN45VG1†-4†
FRN55VG1†-4†
FRN37VG1†-2† M8 13.5
M3.5 1.2
FRN45VG1†-2† FRN75VG1†-4† Figure D
FRN55VG1†-2† M10 27
-- FRN90VG1†-4†
Figure E
-- FRN110VG1†-4†
FRN75VG1†-2† -- Figure F
-- FRN132VG1†-4†
Figure G
-- FRN160VG1†-4†
M3.5 1.2
FRN200VG1†-4†
FRN90VG1†-2† Figure H
FRN220VG1†-4†
-- FRN280VG1†-4† M12 48 M10 27
Figure I
-- FRN315VG1†-4†
-- FRN355VG1†-4†
Figure J
-- FRN400VG1†-4†
-- FRN500VG1†-4†
Figure K
-- FRN630VG1†-4†

When the inverter power is ON, a high voltage is applied to the following terminals.
Main circuit terminals: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, P1, P(+), N(-), DB, U, V, W, R0, T0, R1, T1, AUX-contact (30A, 30B, 30C,
Y5A, Y5C)
Insulation level
Main circuit ― Enclosure : Basic insulation (Overvoltage category III, Pollution degree 2)
Main circuit ― Control circuit : Reinforced insulation (Overvoltage category III, Pollution degree 2)
Relay output ― Control circuit : Reinforced insulation (Overvoltage category II, Pollution degree 2)
An electric shock may occur.

3-17
 Table 3.3-6 Recommended Wire Sizes
Recommended wire size (mm2 )
Power supply

Nominal
Inverter type
voltage

applied Main circuit power input Inverter

motor (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) Grounding output
DCR
(kW) [ G] [P1, P(+)]
HD mode LD mode MD mode w/ DCR w/o DCR [U, V, W]
0.75 FRN0.75VG1†-2† -- --
1.5 FRN1.5VG1†-2† -- --
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
2.2 FRN2.2VG1†-2† -- -- 2.0
3.7 FRN3.7VG1†-2† -- --
5.5 FRN5.5VG1†-2† -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
7.5 FRN7.5VG1†-2† -- -- 3.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Three-phase 200 V

5.5
11 FRN11VG1†-2† -- -- 5.5 14 8.0 8.0
15 FRN15VG1†-2† -- -- 14
14 22 8.0 14
18.5 FRN18.5VG1†-2† -- --
22
22 FRN22VG1†-2† -- -- 22 38 *1 22
14
30 FRN30VG1†-2† -- -- 38
38 60 38
37 FRN37VG1†-2† FRN30VG1†-2† -- 60
45 FRN45VG1†-2† FRN37VG1†-2† -- 60 60
100 100
55 FRN55VG1†-2† FRN45VG1†-2† -- 100 22 100
75 FRN75VG1†-2† FRN55VG1†-2† -- 150 *2 150 *2 150
90 FRN90VG1†-2† FRN75VG1†-2† -- 150 -- 150 200
110 -- FRN90VG1†-2† -- 200 38 200 250
3.7 FRN3.7VG1†-4† -- --
2.0
5.5 FRN5.5VG1†-4† -- -- 2.0 2.0 2.0
2.0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1†-4† -- --
11 FRN11VG1†-4† -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5
15 FRN15VG1†-4† -- -- 3.5 5.5
5.5
18.5 FRN18.5VG1†-4† -- -- 8.0 *3 5.5
5.5 5.5
22 FRN22VG1†-4† -- -- 14 8.0 *3 8.0 *3
30 FRN30VG1†-4† -- -- 14
14 22 14
37 FRN37VG1†-4† FRN30VG1†-4† -- 8.0
22
45 FRN45VG1†-4† FRN37VG1†-4† -- 22
22 38
55 FRN55VG1†-4† FRN45VG1†-4† -- 38 38
Three-phase 400 V

75 FRN75VG1†-4† FRN55VG1†-4† -- 38 14 60
60
90 FRN90VG1†-4† FRN75VG1†-4† -- 60
100
110 FRN110VG1†-4† FRN90VG1†-4† FRN90VG1†-4†
100 100
132 FRN132VG1†-4† FRN110VG1†-4† FRN110VG1†-4† 22
150
160 FRN160VG1†-4† FRN132VG1†-4† FRN132VG1†-4† 150
150
200 FRN200VG1†-4† FRN160VG1†-4† FRN160VG1†-4†
200 250
220 FRN220VG1†-4† FRN200VG1†-4† FRN200VG1†-4† 200
250 -- -- FRN220VG1†-4† 38 250 325
-- FRN220VG1†-4† -- 250 -- 150x2
280
FRN280VG1†-4† -- -- 200x2
325
315 FRN315VG1†-4† -- FRN280VG1†-4† 150x2
60
355 FRN355VG1†-4† FRN280VG1†-4† FRN315VG1†-4† 200x2 250x2
200x2
400 FRN400VG1†-4† FRN315VG1†-4† FRN355VG1†-4†
250x2 325x2
450 -- FRN355VG1†-4† FRN400VG1†-4† 250x2
500 FRN500VG1†-4† FRN400VG1†-4† -- 325x2 100 325x2
325x3
630 FRN630VG1†-4† FRN500VG1†-4† -- 325x3 325x3
710 -- FRN630VG1†-4† -- 250x4 325x4 325x4

*1 Use the crimp terminal model No. 38-6 manufactured by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd., or equivalent.
*2 When using 150 mm2 wires for main circuit terminals of FRN55VG1†-2† (LD mode), use CB150-10 crimp terminals
designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399.
*3 Use the crimp terminal model No. 8-L6 manufactured by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd., or equivalent.

Terminals common to all inverters Recommended wire size (mm2) Remarks

Auxiliary control power input terminals R0 and T0 2.0 --
200 V class series with 37 kW or above and
Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 2.0
400 V class series with 75 kW or above

3-18
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

(2) Control circuit terminals (common to all inverter types)

Table 3.3-7 lists the screw specifications and recommended wire size for wiring of the control circuit
terminals. The control circuit terminals are common to all inverter types regardless of their capacities.
Table 3.3-7 Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Size

Screw specifications
Terminals common to all inverter types Recommended wire size (mm2)

Chap. 3
Screw size Tightening torque (N·m)
Control circuit terminals M3 0.7 1.25 *

* Using wires exceeding the recommended sizes may lift the front cover depending upon the number of wires used,

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

impeding keypad's normal operation.

3.3.3.3 Arrangement of terminals

(1) Control circuit terminals (common to all inverter types)

3-19
(2) Main circuit terminals

3-20
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Chap. 3
PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

3-21
3.3.3.4 Wiring precautions
Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter.
(1) Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate.
(2) Be sure to connect the three-phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1/R,
L2/S and L3/T of the inverter. If the power wires are connected to other terminals, the inverter
will be damaged when the power is turned ON.
(3) Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock, fire or other disasters and to
reduce electric noise.
(4) Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure
a reliable connection.
(5) Keep the power supply wiring (primary circuit) and motor wiring (secondary circuit) of the main
circuit, and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other.
(6) After removing a screw from the main circuit terminal block, be sure to restore the screw even if
no wire is connected.
(7) Use the wiring guide to separate wiring. For inverters with a capacity of 7.5 kW or below, the
wiring guide separates the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires. For inverters with a
capacity of 11 to 22 kW, it separates the upper and lower main circuit wires, and control circuit
wires. Be careful about the wiring order.

FRN7.5VG1†-2† FRN22VG1†-2†

„ Preparing for the wiring guide

Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below are sometimes lacking in wiring space for main circuit
wires depending upon the wire materials used. To assure a sufficient wiring space, remove the clip-off
sections (see below) as required with a nipper. Note that the enclosure rating of IP20 is not ensured
when the wiring guide itself is removed to secure a space for thick main circuit wiring.

Clip-off sections

Before removal of clip-off sections After removal of clip-off sections

Wiring Guide (FRN7.5VG1†-2†)

3-22
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Chap. 3
PREPARATION AND TEST RUN
Clip-off sections

If the inverter output wire size is 22 mm2, remove clip-off section c; if it is 38 mm2,
remove clip-off section d before wiring.

Wiring Guide (FRN22VG1†-2†)

(8) In some types of inverters, the wires from the main circuit terminal block cannot be straight
routed. Route such wires as shown below so that the front cover is set into place.

(9) For inverters with a capacity of 500 kW or 630 kW, two L2/S input terminals are arranged
vertically to the terminal block. When connecting wires to these terminals, use the bolts, washers
and nuts that come with the inverter, as shown below.

3-23
• When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent
protection) in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters. Use the recommended devices within the
recommended current capacity.
• Be sure to use wires in the specified size.
• Tighten terminals with specified torque.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of
handling their wirings together.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause a fire.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
• Be sure to ground the inverter's grounding terminals G.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after shutting down the power.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the
voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power source wires to inverter output terminals (U, V, and W).
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.

3-24
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3.3.5 Connection diagram

Thermal relay Dedicated motor

Transformer *13 (MVK)
*15
FU *13 FU
*7 DBR (option) FV FV
FM
2 FW FW
(CM)
1
(G) P DB

Chap. 3
P DB 2
1
(THR)
(G) P N
Braking unit DBR (option) *6
(option (G)
2
P(+) N(-) (CM)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

1
P DB (THR)
DCR (option) *5

Main circuit
*1 G Grounding P1 P(+) DB N(-)
Grounding *8
Power supply MCCB or *2 terminal G
terminal
RCD/ELCB MC
200 V class series F
U
200 to 230 V L1/R U
R V M
50/60 Hz L2/S C V
W 3
400 V class series L3/T W
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
*11 Inverter unit
Auxiliary control power input - Power switching connector
*3
R0 FRENIC-VG
T0
(CN UX)
- Fan power supply switching connector
R1 (CN R)/(CN W)
Auxiliary fan power input
*4 T1

*9 Control circuit NTC

3 [13] *14 0
0 *14 V TH1 thermistor
2 [TH1]
V THC
Speed setting input [12] [THC]

1 *9
[11] SW6 15V 12V
*12
*9 [Ai1]
(+) *14 *9
Analog input 1 0V
Input signal off PGP
(PGP)
(-) PGM
*12 Voltage input for (PGM)
*9 frequency setting PA PG
[Ai2] (PA)
0 to +10 VDC
Analog input 2 (+) Current input for (PB) PB
Input signal off SS.E
[M] SW3 frequency setting
(-) 4 to 20 mA DC E
+24VDC 0V
(PS) *14

(EN1)
Open collector
(EN2)
output (FA)
*16 (FB)
SINK Complementary
Safety switch output SW7, SW8 (CM)
(PLC) *12
*14
*12 SW1 0V

30C *10
SOURCE

*9 30B Alarm output (for any alarm)

*10 (30A, 30B, 30C)
(FWD)
30 30A
Run forward command
(REV) Y5C Relay output
Run reverse command
Operation ready
Y5A
Digital input 1 (X1) *10
Select multistep speed <Y4>
Digital input 2 Transistor output 4
(X2)
Select multistep speed Detected speed 1
Digital input 3 (X3) <Y3> Transistor output 3
Select multistep speed
Speed arrival
Digital input 4 (X4)
Select multistep speed <Y2> Transistor output 2
Digital input 5 (X5) Speed agreement
ASR, Select ACC/DEC time
Digital input 6 (X6) <Y1> Transistor output 1
ASR, Select ACC/DEC time Speed existence
Digital input 7 (X7)
Coast to a stop
(X8) <CMY> Transistor output common
Digital input 8
Reset alarm
Digital input 9 (THR) (X9)
Enable external alarm trip Analog output 1
(CM) [Ao1] Detected speed 1
Digital input common
Analog output 2
[Ao2] Torque current command
[Ao3] Analog output 3
*14 Speed setting 4
0V [M] Analog output common

DX+
Data transmission
DX- (RS-485)
USB connector
SW4
*12

3-25
(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device
(RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the
inverter to protect wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended
capacity.
(Note 2) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the
MCCB or RCD/ELCB, when necessary.
Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3) To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power supply lines.
Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4) Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power-factor,
regenerative PWM converter (RHC series).
(Note 5) When connecting an optional DC reactor (DCR), remove the jumper bar from the main circuit terminals P1 and P(+).
Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW come with a DCR as standard. Be sure to connect the
DCR.
Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter
rated capacity, or when there are thyristor-driven loads in the same power supply line.
(Note 6) Inverters of 55 kW or below (200 V class series) and those of 160 kW or below (400 V class series) have a built-in
braking transistor, allowing a braking resistor (DBR) to be directly connected between terminals P(+) and DB.
(Note 7) When connecting an optional braking resistor (DBR) to inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class series) or those of
200 kW or above (400 V class series), be sure to use an optional braking unit (BU) together.
Connect the BU between terminals P(+) and N(-). Auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity, so make connection
as shown in the connection diagram.
(Note 8) A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for suppressing
inverter noise.
(Note 9) For wiring enclosed with , use twisted or shielded wires.
In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by
external induction noise, however, connection to 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) or 0V ([CM], (PGM)) may be effective to
suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or more).
Never install them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set
them at right angles.
(Note 10) The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], transistor
output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], and relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C].
(Note 11) Switching connectors in the main circuits. For details, refer to Section 3.3.3.7 "Switching connectors."
(Note 12) Slide switches on the control printed circuit board (control PCB). Use these switches to customize the inverter
operations. For details, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(Note 13) The cooling fan power supply for motors of 7.5 kW or less is single-phase. Connect terminals [FU] and [FV].
For motors of 7.5 kW or less (400 V class series), the power voltage/frequency rating of the cooling fan is 200 V/50
Hz or 200-230 V/60 Hz. For motors of 11 kW or above (400 V class series), it is 400-420 V/50 Hz or 400-440 V/60
Hz. To use the fan with power voltage other than the above specifications, a transformer is necessary.
(Note 14) 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) and 0V ([CM], (PGM)) are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 15) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 16) Jumper bars are mounted between safety terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] by factory default. To use the safety
function, remove the jumper bars before connection of safety devices.

3-26
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3.3.6 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals

Primary grounding terminal ( G) for inverter enclosure
Two grounding terminals ( G) are not exclusive to the power supply wiring (primary circuit) or motor
wiring (secondary circuit). Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and
noise reduction. The inverter is designed for use with safety grounding to avoid electric shock, fire and
other disasters.

Chap. 3
The grounding terminal for inverter enclosure should be grounded as follows:
1) Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
2) Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Inverter output terminals U, V, and W and secondary grounding terminals ( G) for motor
Inverter’s output terminals should be connected as follows:
1) Connect the three wires of the 3-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W, aligning the phases each
other.
2) Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal ( G).
When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore
cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together.

DC reactor terminals P1 and P(+)

Connect a DC reactor (DCR) to these terminals for power factor correction.
1) Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P(+).
(Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW are not equipped with a jumper
bar.)
2) Connect an optional DCR to those terminals.
• The wiring length should be 10 m or below.
• Do not remove the jumper bar when a DCR is not used.
• For inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW, a DCR is provided as standard. Be
sure to connect the DCR to the inverter.
• When a PWM converter is connected to the inverter, no DCR is required.

Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds
500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.

3-27
 DC braking resistor terminals P(+) and DB (Inverters of 55 kW or below for 200 V class
series and those of 160 kW or below for 400 V class series)
1) Connect an optional DBR to terminals P(+) and DB.
2) Arrange the DBR and inverter so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two DBR
wires or route them together in parallel.

When connecting a DC braking resistor (DBR), never connect it to terminals other than terminals P(+) and
DB.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.

DC link bus terminals P(+) and N(-)

Braking Built-in DC braking
Capacity (kW) Optional devices Devices and terminals
transistor resistor (DBR)

75 to 90 (200 V) Braking unit Inverter–Braking unit: P(+) and

None None
200 to 630 (400 V) DC braking resistor (DBR) N(-)

1) Connecting an optional braking unit or DC braking resistor (DBR)

Inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class series) and those of 200 kW or above (400 V class series)
require both a braking unit and DBR.
Connect the terminals P(+) and N(-) of a braking unit to those on the inverter. Arrange the inverter and
the braking unit so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them
together in parallel.
Next, connect the terminals P(+) and DB of a DBR to those on the braking unit. Arrange the braking
unit and DBR so that the wiring length comes to 10 m or less and twist the two wires or route them
together in parallel.
For details about the wiring, refer to the Braking Unit Instruction Manual.

2) Connecting other external devices

A DC link bus of other inverter(s) or a PWM converter is connectable to these terminals.
For connection examples at the PWM converter side, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.2 "Power
regenerative PWM converters, RHC series."

3-28
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Main circuit power input terminals L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T (three-phase input)
The three-phase input power lines are connected to these terminals.
1) For safety, make sure that the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) is
turned OFF before wiring the main circuit power input terminals.
2) Connect the main circuit power supply wires (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T) to the input terminals of the
inverter via an MCCB or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit

Chap. 3
breaker (ELCB)*, and an MC if necessary.
It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter
with each other.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

* With overcurrent protection

It is recommended to insert a manually operable magnetic contactor (MC) that allows you to
disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency (e.g., when the protective
function is activated), preventing a failure or accident from causing secondary disasters.

Auxiliary control power input terminals R0 and T0

In general, the inverter runs normally without power supplied to the auxiliary control power input
terminals R0 and T0. If the inverter main power is shut down, however, no power is supplied to the
control circuit so that the inverter cannot issue a variety of output signals or display on the keypad.
To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the
protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect the
auxiliary control power input terminals R0 and T0 to the power supply lines. If a magnetic contactor
(MC) is installed in the inverter's primary circuit, connect the primary circuit of the MC to these
terminals R0 and T0.
Terminal rating:
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A (200 V class series with 22 kW or below)
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A (200 V class series with 30 kW or above)
380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Maximum current 0.5 A (400 V class series)

When introducing a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit

breaker (ELCB), connect its output (secondary) side to terminals R0 and T0. Connecting its
input (primary) side to those terminals causes the RCD/ELCB to malfunction since the input
power voltage to the inverter is three-phase but the one to terminals R0 and T0 is
single-phase. To avoid such problems, be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary
B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown below.

Figure 3.3-6 Connection Example of Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/

Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)

3-29
 When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter, do not connect the power supply line
directly to terminals R0 and T0. If a PWM is to be connected, insert an insulation transformer
or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor at the power supply side.
For connection examples at the PWM converter side, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.2 "Power
regenerative PWM converters, RHC series."

Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1

The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped
with terminals R1 and T1. Only if the inverter works with the DC-linked power input whose source is
a PWM converter, these terminals are used to feed AC power to the fans, while they are not used in
any power system of ordinary configuration.
In this case, set up the fan power supply switching connectors (CN R and CN W).
Terminal rating:
(200 V class series with 37 kW or above)
200-220 VAC/50 Hz, 200-230 VAC/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A
(400 V class series with 75 kW to 400 kW)
380-440 VAC/50 Hz, 380-480 VAC/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A
(400 V class series with 500 kW and 630 kW)
380-440 VAC/50 Hz, 380-480 VAC/60 Hz, Maximum current 2.0 A

3-30
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3.3.7 Switching connectors

„ Power switching connectors (CN UX), for inverters of 75 kW or above (400 V class series)
Inverters of 75 kW or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a set of switching connectors
(male) which should be configured according to the power source voltage and frequency. By factory
default, a jumper (female connector) is set to U1. If the power supply to the main power inputs (L1/R,
L2/S, L3/T) or the auxiliary fan power input terminals (R1, T1) matches the conditions listed below,

Chap. 3
change the jumper to U2.
For the switching instructions, see Figures 3.3-7 and 3.3-8.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

(a) FRN75VG1†-4† to FRN110VG1†-4†

CN UX (red) CN UX (red)

Connector configuration

398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to 480 V/60 Hz 380 to 398 V/50 Hz
Power source voltage
(Factory default) 380 to 430 V/60 Hz

(b) FRN132VG1†-4† to FRN630VG1†-4†

CN UX (red)
CN UX (red)
Connector configuration

398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to 480 V/60 Hz 380 to 398 V/50 Hz,
Power source voltage
(Factory default) 380 to 430 V/60 Hz

The allowable power input voltage fluctuation is within -15% to +10% of the power source
voltage.

3-31
„ Fan power supply switching connectors (CN R and CN W), for inverters of 37 kW or above
(200 V class series) and those of 75 kW or above (400 V class series)
The standard FRENIC-VG series accepts DC-linked power input in combination with a PWM
converter. The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above,
however, contain AC-driven components such as AC fans. To supply AC power to those components,
exchange the CN R and CN W connectors as shown below and connect the AC power line to the
auxiliary fan power input terminals (R1, T1).
For the switching instructions, see Figures 3.3-7 and 3.3-8.

(a) FRN37VG1†-2† to FRN75VG1†-2†, FRN75VG1†-4† to FRN110VG1†-4†

CN R (red) CN W (white) CN W (white)

CN R (red)
Connector configuration

When using terminals R1 and T1

When not using terminal R1 or T1
Use conditions (Factory default) • Feeding the DC-linked power
• Combined with a PWM converter

(b) FRN90VG1†-2†, FRN132VG1†-4† to FRN630VG1†-4†

Connector configuration
CN R CN W
CN W (red) CN R (white)
(white) (red)
When using terminals R1 and T1
When not using terminal R1 or T1
Use conditions (Factory default) • Feeding the DC-linked power
• Combined with a PWM converter

By factory default, the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W are set on
the FAN and NC positions, respectively. Do not exchange them unless you drive the
inverter with a DC-linked power supply.
Wrong configuration of these switching connectors cannot drive the cooling fans, causing a
heat sink overheat alarm 0h1 or a charger circuit alarm pbf.

3-32
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

„ Location of the switching connectors

The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board (power PCB) as shown below.

Power switching
connectors (CN UX)
Keypad enclosure
Fan power
supply switching
connectors

Chap. 3
(CN R and
CN W)

Auxiliary fan
power input
terminals

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Power PCB

Auxiliary
Auxiliary
power input
power input
terminals
terminals
Fan power
supply
Auxiliary fan power input
switching
terminals
connectors
(CN R and
Power switching CN W)
connectors (CN UX)

(a) FRN37VG1†-2† to FRN75VG1†-2†, (b) FRN90VG1†-2†,

FRN75VG1†-4† to FRN110VG1†-4† FRN132VG1†-4† to FRN630VG1†-4†

Figure 3.3-7 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals

To remove each of the jumpers, pinch its upper side

between your fingers, unlock its fastener, and pull it
up.
When mounting it, fit the jumper over the connector
until it snaps into place.

Figure 3.3-8 Inserting/Removing the Jumpers

3-33
3.3.3.8 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals

In general, the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e.,
reinforced insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live
conductor of the main circuit, the insulation of the cover might break down, which would expose the signal
wire to a high voltage of the main circuit. Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact
with live conductors of the main circuit.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident.

Noise may be emitted from the inverter, motor and wires. Take appropriate measures to prevent the nearby
sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise.
It takes a maximum of 5 seconds to establish the input/output of the control circuit after the main power is
turned ON. Take appropriate measures, such as external timers.
An accident could occur.

Table 3.3-8 lists the symbols, names and functions of the control circuit terminals. The wiring to the
control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes, which reflects the
use of the inverter. Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise.
Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals
Classifi-
cation

Symbol Name Functions

[13] Power supply Power supply (+10 VDC) for an external speed command potentiometer.
for the (Variable resistor: 1 to 5kΩ)
potentiometer The potentiometer of 1/2 W rating or more should be connected.
[12] Analog setting (1) The speed is commanded according to the external voltage input.
voltage input • 0 to ±10 VDC/0 to maximum speed
(2) Hardware specifications
• Input impedance: 10kΩ
• The maximum input is ±15 VDC, however, the voltage higher than ±10
VDC is regarded as ±10 VDC.
[Ai1] Analog input 1 (1) Analog input voltage from external equipment.
[Ai2] Analog input 2 Possible to assign various signal functions (Input signal off, Auxiliary speed
setting 1, Torque limiter (level 1, etc.), selected with Function codes E49 and
E50 to these terminals. For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function
Codes."
Analog input

(2) Hardware specifications

Only for terminal [Ai2], the input is switchable between voltage and current
with the SW3 configuration. (For details about slide switches, refer to Section
3.3.3.9.)
To use terminal [Ai2] for current input speed setting (N-REFC), turn SW3 to
the I position, set F01 or C25 to "9" and set E50 to "26." After that, check that
the current input is normal on the I./O check screen (given in Section 3.4.4.5).
Voltage input
• Input impedance: 10kΩ
• The maximum input is ±15 VDC, however, the voltage higher than ±10
VDC is regarded as ±10 VDC.
Current input (only on terminal [Ai2])
• Input impedance: 250Ω
• The maximum input is a maximum of 30 mADC; however, the current
higher than 20 mADC is regarded as 20 mADC.
[11] Analog input Common for analog input signals ([12], [Ai1] and [Ai2]).
[M] common Isolated from terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].

3-34
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
Symbol Name Functions

- Since low level analog signals are handled, these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise
effects. Route the wiring as short as possible (within 20 m) and use shielded wires. In principle, ground
the shielded sheath of wires; if effects of external inductive noises are considerable, connection to

Chap. 3
terminal [11] may be effective. As shown in Figures 3.3-9 and 3.3-10, be sure to ground the single end of
the shield to enhance the shield effect.
- Use a twin-contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit. Do not connect the
relay's contact to terminal [11] or [M].

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

- When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal, the external device
may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter. If this happens, according to the
circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or equivalent) to the device outputting the analog
signal or connect a capacitor having the good cut-off characteristics for high frequency between control
signal wires as shown in Figures 3.3-9 and 3.3-10.
- Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1]. Doing so could damage the internal
control circuit.

Figure 3.3-9 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 3.3-10 Example of Electric Noise Reduction

[FWD] Run forward (1) When terminals [FWD] and [CM] are closed, the motor runs in the forward direction;
command when they are opened, the motor decelerates to a stop.
Digital input

(2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the slide switch SW1. (Refer
to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
[REV] Run reverse (1) When terminals [REV] and [CM] are closed, the motor runs in the reverse direction;
command when they are opened, the motor decelerates to a stop.
(2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the slide switch SW1. (Refer
to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
[X1] Digital input 1 (1) Various signals such as "Coast to a stop," "Enable external alarm trip," and "Select
multistep speed" can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E01 to
[X2] Digital input 2
E09. For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Codes."
[X3] Digital input 3 (2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the slide switch SW1. (Refer
[X4] Digital input 4 to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(3) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals [X1] to [X9]. If the logic
[X5] Digital input 5 value for ON of the terminal [X1] is 1 in the normal logic system, for example, OFF is
[X6] Digital input 6 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa.
(Digital input circuit specifications)
[X7] Digital input 7
[X8] Digital input 8
Item Min. Max.
[X9] Digital input 9
Operating voltage ON level 0V 2V
(SINK) OFF level 22 V 27 V
Operating voltage ON level 22 V 27 V
(SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
Operating current at ON
− 4.5 mA
(Input voltage is at 0 V)
Allowable leakage current at
− 0.5 mA
OFF

Figure 3.3-11 Digital Input Circuit

3-35
Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[EN1] Enable input (1) When [EN1]-[PS] or [EN2]-[PS] is opened (OFF), the inverter output transistor stops
its operation. (Safe Torque Off, STO)
[EN2]
To enable the STO function, remove the jumper bars.
(2) The input mode of terminals [EN1] and [EN2] is fixed at SOURCE. It cannot be
switched to SINK.
(3) When not using the Enable input function, short the circuit between [EN1]-[PS] and
[EN2]-[PS] with jumper bars (that is, keep the short bars connected).
(Terminal EN circuit specification)

<Control circuit>

Jumper bar PS +24 VDC Item Min. Max.

Operating voltage ON level 22 V 27 V
Photocoupler (SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
EN1
Operating current at ON
− 4.5 mA
6.6kW (Input voltage is at 0 V)
Allowable leakage current at
− 0.5 mA
OFF
EN2

6.6kW

CM

[PS] [EN] terminal Power terminal for terminals [EN1] and [EN2].
power This terminal outputs +24 VDC (Reference for terminal [CM]).
Digital input

[PLC] PLC signal (1) Connects to PLC output signal power supply.
power Rated voltage: +24 VDC (Allowable range: +22 to +27 VDC), Maximum 100 mA DC
(2) This terminal also supplies a power to the load connected to the transistor output
terminals. Refer to "Transistor output" described later in this table for more.
[CM] Digital input Two common terminals for digital input signals
common Electrically isolated from terminals [11], [M], and [CMY].
„ Using a relay contact to turn [FWD], [REV], or [X1] to [X9] ON or OFF
Figure 3.3-12 shows two examples of a circuit configuration that uses a relay contact to turn control signal
input [X1] to [X9], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit (a), the slide switch is turned to SINK, whereas in
circuit (b) it is turned to SOURCE.
Note: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay.
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW.)

<Control circuit> <Control circuit>

[PLC] SINK [PLC] SINK

+24 VDC

+24 VDC

SOURCE SOURCE
[X1] to [X9], [X1] to [X9],
[FWD], [REV] Photocoupler [FWD], [REV] Photocoupler

[CM] [CM]

(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 3.3-12 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact

3-36
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
Symbol Name Functions

„ Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn [FWD], [REV], or [X1] to [X9] ON or OFF
Figure 3.3-13 shows two examples of a circuit configuration that uses a programmable logic controller
(PLC) to turn control signal input [X1] to [X9], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit (a), the slide switch

Chap. 3
is turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b) it is turned to SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit in the PLC using an
external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal [FWD], [REV], or [X1] to [X9]. When using this type
of circuit, observe the following:

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

- Connect the + node of the external power supply (which should be isolated from the PLC's power) to
terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
- Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
Digital input

Programmable Programmable
<Control circuit> logic controller <Control circuit>
logic controller

[PLC] SINK [PLC] SINK

+24 VDC

+24 VDC
SOURCE SOURCE
[X1] to [X9], [X1] to [X9],
[FWD], [REV] Photocoupler [FWD], [REV] Photocoupler

[CM] [CM]

(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 3.3-13 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC

For details about the slide switch setting, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
[Ao1] Analog (1) Output of monitor signals with analog voltage 0 to ±10 VDC.
output 1 Various signals such as "Detected speed," "Speed setting," and "Torque current
[Ao2] Analog command" can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E67 to E71.
output 2 For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Codes."
Analog output

(2) Hardware specifications

[Ao3] Analog • Connectable impedance: Min. 3kΩ
output 3
• Gain adjustment range: 0.00 to ±100.00 times
Note: For these terminals, select devices having input terminals with a small capacitive
load. Large capacitive load may cause the output to oscillate.
[M] Analog Common for analog output signals ([Ao1], [Ao2] and [Ao3]).
common Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].

3-37
Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[Y1] Transistor (1) Various signals such as "Inverter running," "Speed valid," and "Speed agreement" can
output 1 be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E15 to E18. For details, refer
to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Codes."
[Y2] Transistor
output 2 (2) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals between [Y1] to [Y4], and
[CMY]. If the logic value for ON between [Y1] to [Y4] and [CMY] is 1 in the normal
[Y3] Transistor logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa.
output 3
[Y4] Transistor (Transistor output circuit specification)
output 4
<Control circuit>
Photocoupler
Item Max.
Current

Operation ON level 2V
[Y1]
to voltage OFF level 27 V
[Y4]

Voltage
31 to 35 V Maximum current at ON 50 mA
[CMY]
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA

Figure 3.3-14 Transistor Output Circuit

- When a transistor output drives a control relay, connect a surge-absorbing diode

across relay’s coil terminals.
Transistor output

- When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be

supplied with DC power, feed the power (+24 VDC: allowable range: +22 to
+27 VDC, 100 mA max.) through the [PLC] terminal. Short-circuit between the
terminals [CMY] and [CM] in this case.
[CMY] Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signals
output Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [11], [M], and [PGM].
common
„ Connecting programmable logic controller (PLC) to terminal [Y1], [Y2], [Y3] or [Y4]
Figure 3.3-15 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter’s
control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control
circuit output, whereas in example (b), it serves as a SOURCE for the output.
<Control circuit> Programmable <Control circuit> Programmable
logic controller
logic controller
Photocoupler Current C0
Photocoupler Current
+24 VDC

[Y1]
to SINK input [Y1]
[Y4] to
31 to [Y4]
35 V 31 to
+24 VDC

[CMY] 35 V
[CMY] SOURCE input

C0

(a) PLC serving as SINK (b) PLC serving as SOURCE

Figure 3.3-15 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit

3-38
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[Y5A/C] General purpose (1) A general-purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the
relay output transistor output terminal [Y1], [Y2], [Y3] or [Y4].
Contact rating: 250 VAC 0.3 A, cos φ = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5 A

Chap. 3
(2) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to the following two
contact output modes: "Active ON" (Terminals [Y5A] and [Y5C] are closed
Relay output

(excited) if the signal is active.) and "Active OFF" (Terminals [Y5A] and [Y5C]
are opened (non-excited) if the signal is active while they are normally closed.).

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

[30A/B/C] Alarm relay (1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a protective function has been activated to
output stop the motor.
(for any error) Contact rating: 250 VAC, 0.3A, cos φ = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A
(2) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to the following two
contact output modes: "Active ON" (Terminals [30A] and [30C] are closed
(excited) if the signal is active.) and "Active OFF" (Terminals [30A] and [30C] are
opened (non-excited) if the signal is active while they are normally closed.).
RJ-45 RS-485 Connector to join the keypad to the inverter.
connector communications Power is supplied to the keypad from the inverter via a remote operation extension
for the port 1 cable.
keypad (Connector for
keypad)
[DX+]/ RS-485 Input/output terminals to transmit data through the RS-485 multipoint protocol
[DX-] communications between the inverter and a computer or other equipment such as a PLC.
Communication

port 2 (For setting of the terminating resistor, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide
(Terminals switches.")
on control PCB)
USB USB port A USB port connector (mini B) that connects an inverter to a computer. FRENIC-VG
connector (On the keypad) Loader (inverter support software*) running on the computer supports editing the
function codes, transferring them to the inverter, verifying them, test-running an
inverter and monitoring the inverter running status.
* FRENIC-VG Loader (free version) is available as an install from the CD-ROM (that
comes with the inverter as an accessory) or as a free download from our website at:
http://www.fujielectric.com/products/inverter/download/
The free version supports editing, transferring and verifying of function codes and
the traceback function.
[PA] Pulse generator The PG interface uses a complementary output mode.
2-phase signal [PA]: Input terminal for A phase of the pulse generator
[PB]
input [PB]: Input terminal B phase of the pulse generator
When 12V power supply is in use: H level ≥ 9V, L level ≤ 1.5V
When 15V power supply is in use: H level ≥ 12V, L level ≤ 1.5V
Input pulse frequency: 100 kHz or below, Duty: 50 ±10%
Wiring length (as a guide): 100 m or less
Speed detection

(Note) False detection may occur due to noise. Make the wiring length as short as
possible and take sufficient noise control measures.
[PGP] Pulse generator Power supply terminal for a pulse generator.
power supply Output: +12 VDC ±10% or +15 VDC ±10%
Maximum current: 270 mA
(For output voltage switch SW6, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide
switches.")
[PGM] Common Common terminal for pulse generator power/signal.
terminal Electrically isolated from terminals [11], [M] and [CMY].
Not electrically isolated from terminal [CM], but not equivalent voltage.

3-39
Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[FA] Pulse generator (1) This outputs pulse generator signals with frequency divided to 1/n (where, n is
output programmable with Function code E29).
[FB]
(2) Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage
on the [PGP] terminal) transistor outputs.
(For switching, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches.")
<Control circuit>
<Control circuit>
P
FA, FB PGP

15kΩ

FA, FB
CM
CM 10Ω

CM
CM

(a) Open collector output (b) Complementary output

Figure 3.3-16 Pulse Output Circuit

Items Min. Max. Remarks

Output voltage Output voltage - 2V
(Open collector output) Max. output current - 15 mA
Output voltage Hi level output PGP-3V -
(Complementary Low level output - 2V
output) Max. output current - 20 mA

[CM] Pulse generator Common terminal for [FA] and [FB].

output common
[TH1] NTC/PTC Monitors the motor temperature with NTC or PTC thermistor.
thermistor For a PTC thermistor, the motor overheat protection level can be specified with
Temperature
detection

connection Function code E32.

[THC] Common Common terminal for NTC and PTC thermistors.
Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [PGM], and [CMY]

3-40
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

„ Wiring for control circuit terminals

For FRN75VG1†-2†, FRN90VG1†-2† and FRN132VG1†-4† to FRN630VG1†-4†
(1) As shown in Figure 3.3-17, route the control circuit wires along the left side panel to the outside of
the inverter.
(2) Secure those wires to the wiring support, using a cable tie (e.g., Insulok) with 3.8 mm or less in
width and 1.5 mm or less in thickness.

Chap. 3
Cable tie

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Wiring support
Control circuit terminal block

Wiring for control

circuit terminals

Section A

Details of Section A

Left side panel

Wiring for control

circuit terminals

Figure 3.3-17 Wiring Route and Fixing Position for the Control Circuit Wires

- Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit
as possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
- Fix the control circuit wires with a cable tie inside the inverter to keep them away from the
live parts of the main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).

3-41
3.3.3.9 Setting up the slide switches

Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate, turn OFF the power and
wait at least five minutes for inverters of 22 kW or below, or at least ten minutes for those of 30 kW or
above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a
multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has
dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge
in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF.

Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode
of the analog output terminals, digital I/O terminals, and communications ports. The locations of those
switches are shown in Figure 3.3-18 "Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB."
To access the slide switches, remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB. For inverters
with a capacity of 30 kW or above, open also the keypad enclosure.
For details on how to remove the front cover and how to open and close the keypad enclosure,
refer to Section 3.3.3.1 "Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide."

Table 3.3-9 lists function of each slide switch.

Table 3.3-9 Function of Each Slide Switch

Switch Function
Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE.
SW1 ▪ This switches the input mode of digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], [FWD] and [REV] to be used as
the SINK or SOURCE mode.
▪ Factory default: SINK
SW2 Reserved for particular manufacturers.
Switches the input mode of the analog input terminal [Ai2] between voltage and current.

Input form SW3

SW3
Voltage input (Factory default) V position
Current input I position

Switches the terminating resistor of RS-485 communications port 2 on the terminal block ON and OFF.
(RS-485 communications port 2, for connecting the keypad)
SW4
▪ If the inverter is connected to the RS-485 communications network as a terminating device, turn SW3
to ON.
SW5 Reserved for particular manufacturers.
Switches the output voltage of terminal [PGP] between 12 V and 15 V.
Select the voltage level that matches the power voltage of the pulse generator to be connected.

SW6 Output voltage SW5

12 V 12 V
15 V (Factory default) 15 V

Switch the output mode of terminals [FA] and [FB] between open collector output and complementary
output.

SW7 SW7 SW8

Output form (Terminal [FA]) (Terminal [FB])
SW8
Open collector output (Factory default) 1 1
Complementary output 2 2

3-42
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

Figure 3.3-18 shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input/output terminal
configuration.

Chap. 3
SW5

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

SW8 SW7
SW1
SW3

SW2 SW4
SW6

Figure 3.3-18 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB

Switch Configuration and Factory Defaults

SW7
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
SW8
SINK
V OFF
Factory
default
15V 1

SOURCE 12V 2
I ON
---

To move a switch slider, use a tool with a narrow tip (e.g., a tip of tweezers). Be careful not to
touch other electronic parts, etc. If the slider is in an ambiguous position, the circuit is unclear
whether it is turned ON or OFF and the digital input remains in an undefined state. Be sure to
place the slider so that it contacts either side of the switch.
SW2 and SW5 are reserved for particular manufacturers. Do not access them.

3-43
3.3.4 Mounting and connecting a keypad
3.3.4.1 Parts required for connection
To mount a keypad on a place other than an inverter, the parts listed below are needed.
Parts name Model Remarks
Extension cable (Note 1) CB-5S, CB-3S and CB-1S 3 types available in length of 5 m, 3 m, and 1 m.
Fixing screw M3 × † (Note 2) Two screws needed. (To be provided by the customer)

(Note 1) When using an off-the-shelf LAN cable, use a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight type cable compliant with
US ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A Category 5. (20 m or less)
Recommended LAN cable
Manufacturer: Sanwa Supply Inc.
Model: KB-10T5-01K (1 m)
KB-STP-01K: (1 m) (Shielded LAN cable to make the inverter compliant with the EMC
Directive)
(Note 2) When mounting on a panel wall, use the screws with a length suitable for the wall thickness.

3.3.4.2 Mounting procedure

You can install and/or use the keypad in one of the following three ways:
„ Mounting it directly on the inverter (See Figure 3.3-19 (a), (b).)
„ Mounting it on the panel (See Figure 3.3-20.)
„ Using it remotely in your hand (See Figure 3.3-21.)

(a) FRN15VG1†-2† (b) FRN37VG1†-2†

Figure 3.3-19 Mounting the Keypad Directly on the Inverter

Figure 3.3-20 Mounting the Keypad on the Panel Figure 3.3-21 Using the Keypad Remotely in
Your Hand

3-44
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

After completion of wiring, mount the keypad using the following procedure. Make sure that the
inverter power is shut down beforehand.
„ Removing and mounting the keypad from/onto the inverter
(1) Remove the keypad by pulling it toward you with the hook held down as directed by the arrows in
Figure 3.3-22.

Chap. 3
PREPARATION AND TEST RUN
Figure 3.3-22 Removing a Keypad

(2) Put the keypad in the original slot while engaging its bottom latches with the holes (as shown
below), and push it onto the case of the inverter (arrow ) while holding it downward (against the
terminal block cover) (arrow ).

Figure 3.3-23 Mounting the Keypad

3-45
„ Mounting the keypad on the panel
(1) Cut the panel out for a single square area and perforate two screw holes on the panel wall as
shown in Figure 3.3-24.

Figure 3.3-24 Location of Screw Holes and Dimension of Panel Cutout

3-46
 3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

(2) Mount the keypad on the panel wall with 2 screws as shown below. (Recommended tightening
torque: 0.7 N•m)

Chap. 3
PREPARATION AND TEST RUN
Figure 3.3-25 Mounting the Keypad

(3) Using a remote operation extension cable or a LAN cable, interconnect the keypad and the
inverter (insert one end of the cable into the RS-485 port with RJ-45 connector on the keypad and
the other end into that on the inverter) (See Figure 3.3-26).

Figure 3.3-26 Connecting the Keypad to the Inverter with Remote Operation Extension
Cable or an Off-the-shelf LAN Cable

• The RJ-45 connector on the inverter is exclusive to communication via a touch panel. With the RJ-45
connector, neither RS-485 communication nor connection with FRENIC-VG Loader is possible.
• Do not connect the inverter to a LAN port of a computer, Ethernet hub, or telephone line. Doing so may
damage the inverter or devices connected.
A fire or accident could occur.

„ Using the keypad remotely in hand

Follow step (3) of "Mounting the keypad on the panel" above.

3-47
3.3.5 USB connectivity
At the right side of the keypad mounting place, a USB port (mini B connector) is provided. To connect
a USB cable, open the USB port cover as shown below.

USB port cover

USB connector

Connector for
manufacturers

Figure 3.3-27 Connecting a USB Cable

Connecting the inverter to a PC with a USB cable enables remote control from FRENIC-VG Loader.
On the PC running FRENIC-VG Loader, it is possible to edit, check and manage the inverter's
function code data and monitor the real-time data and the running/alarm status of the inverter.

Connector located beneath the USB connector is provided for particular manufacturers. Do not access it.
Otherwise, a fire or accident could occur.

3-48
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.1 Names and functions of keypad components
The keypad allows you to start and stop the motor, view various data including maintenance
information and alarm information, configure function codes, monitor I/O signal status, copy data, and

Chap. 3
calculate the load factor.
7-segment LED monitor

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

LCD monitor Indicator indexes

RUN key
Program key (forward)

LED lamp

Shift key RUN key

(reverse)

Reset key STOP key

UP key HELP key Function/Data key

DOWN key

3-49
 Table 3.4-1 Overview of Keypad Functions

Item Monitors and Keys Functions

Five-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the
operation modes:
„ In Running mode: Running status information (e.g., detected speed, speed
command, and torque command)
„ In Programming mode: Same as above.
„ In Alarm mode: Alarm code, which identifies the cause of alarm when the
protective function is activated.
Monitors LCD monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes:
„ In Running mode: Running status information
„ In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
„ In Alarm mode: Alarm information, which identifies the cause of an alarm
when the protective function is activated.
In Running mode, these indexes show the unit of the number displayed on the
Indicator indexes 7-segment LED monitor and the running status information on the LCD monitor. For
details, see the next page.

Switches the operation modes of the inverter.

Shifts the cursor to the right for entry of a numerical value.

Pressing this key after removing the cause of an alarm switches the inverter to
Running mode.
This key is used to reset settings or screen transition.

/ UP and DOWN keys, which are used to select the setting items or change function
code data.
Function/Data key, which switches the operation mode as follows:
„ In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed
concerning the status of the inverter (detected speed,
Programming speed command, torque command, etc.).
keys „ In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function code and
establishes the newly entered data.
„ In Alarm mode: Pressing this key displays the details of the problem
indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED
monitor.
This simultaneous keying toggles between the ordinary running mode and jogging
+ mode.
The current mode appears on the corresponding indicator.
This simultaneous keying toggles between the remote and local modes.
+
The current mode appears on the corresponding indicator.
This simultaneous keying jumps the cursor to the preceding/following function code
+ /
group (F to M) in selecting a function code.

Starts running the motor in the forward rotation.

Starts running the motor in the reverse rotation.

Operation
keys Stops the motor.

Switches the screen to the operation guide display prepared for each operation mode
or to the menu function guide display.

LED
Lights when the inverter is running.
lamp

3-50
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

Details of Indicator Indexes

Indicators for the unit of

number on the LED monitor

Chap. 3
Indicators for the running status
and run command source

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Type Item Description (information, condition, status)
Hz Output frequency
A Output current
V Output voltage
% Torque command, calculated torque, and load factor
kW Input power and motor output
Unit of number
r/min Preset and actual (detected) motor speeds
on LED monitor
m/min Preset and actual line speeds
X10 Data exceeding 99,999
min Not used.
sec Not used.
VG5 Not used.
FWD Running in forward rotation
Running status REV Running in reverse rotation
STOP No output frequency
REM Remote mode (Run command and speed command sources selected by F02 and
F01)
(In the remote mode, a run command entered via the communications link takes
effect. This indicator goes off when H30 = 2 or 3.)
LOC Local mode (Run command and speed command sources from the keypad,
independent of the setting of F02 and F01.)
Run command
source COMM Via communications link
JOG Jogging mode
HAND Via keypad
This indicator lights also:
- in local mode or
- in remote mode and when H30 = 0 and F02 = 0

3-51
3.4.2 Overview of operation modes
The FRENIC-VG features the following three operation modes.
Table 3.4-2 Operation Modes

Mode Description
This mode allows you to specify run/stop commands in regular operation. It is also possible
Running Mode to monitor the running status in real time.
If a light alarm occurs, the l-al* appears on the LED monitor.
This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information
Programming Mode
relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
If an alarm condition arises, the inverter automatically enters the Alarm mode in which you
Alarm Mode can view the corresponding alarm code* and its related information on the LED and LCD
monitors.

* Alarm code that represents the cause(s) of the alarm(s) that has been triggered by the protective function. For details,
refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.5 "Protective Functions."

Figure 3.4-1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes.

Power ON

Running mode
Programming mode
Run/Stop of motor Configuration of function
code data and monitor of
Monitor of running status maintenance/alarm info
or and various status
Detection of Release of
a light alarm a light alarm
Run/Stop of motor

Light alarm displayed

(Press this key if

an alarm has
occurred.)
Occurrence of Release of
an alarm an alarm

Alarm mode

Display of alarm status

Figure 3.4-1 Status Transition between Operation Modes

3-52
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.3 Running mode

When the inverter is turned ON, it automatically enters Running mode in which you can:
[1] Configure speed commands,
[2] Run or stop the motor,
[3] Monitor the running status,

Chap. 3
[4] Jog (inch) the motor, and
[5] Monitor light alarms.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

3.4.3.1 Configuring the speed command
Using and keys (F01 = 0 (factory default))
(1) Set function code F01 at "0". This cannot be done when the keypad is in Programming mode or
Alarm mode. To enable speed setting using the and keys, first switch the keypad to Running
mode.
(2) Press the or key. The lowest digit on the LED monitor blinks. The 7-segment LED monitor
displays the speed command and the LCD monitor displays the related information including the
operation guide, as shown below.
(3) Press the or key again to change the frequency command. The new setting can be saved into
the inverter’s internal memory.
When the speed command source is other than digital setting, the LCD monitor displays the
following.

Means that the keypad is

not enabled.

Means that the setting on the

analog terminal [12] is effective.

Table 3.4-3 lists the available command sources and their symbols.
Table 3.4-3 Available Command Sources

Symbol Command source Symbol Command source Symbol Command source

HAND Keypad DIB DIB card PID-AI PID analog input command Ai
Voltage input Terminal command
12 ± on terminal [12] MULTI SS8, SS4, SS2, SS1 PID-HAND PID keypad command
(with polarity) ("Select multistep speed")
Terminal command LE
Voltage input ("Enable communications
12 on terminal [12] LINK link") JOG Jogging speed
(without polarity) H30: Communications Link
Function (Link operation)
UPAC SW1
UP/DOWN control (Speed command 1): Inverter support software
U/D1 UPAC LOADER
(Default = 0) Enable "FRENIC-VG Loader"
(Available soon)
Terminal command SYN
Voltage input
UP/DOWN control ("Synchronous operation
U/D2 PTI AI-V on analog input terminal
(Default = Previous value) command (pulse train)"):
N-REFV
Enable
UP/DOWN control Orientation
U/D3 ORT LOCAL Keypad in local mode
(Default = CRP1, 2) (Available soon)
Current input
Terminal command LOCK
DIA DIA card LOCK AI-C on analog input terminal
("Servo-lock command")
N-REFC

3-53
3.4.3.2 Running or stopping the motor
By factory default, pressing the key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing
the key, in the reverse direction. Pressing the key decelerates the motor to stop. The keypad
operation is possible only in Running and Programming modes.

Figure 3.4-2 Rotation Direction of Motor

Note) The rotation direction of IEC-compliant motors is opposite to the one shown above.

„ Displaying the running status on the LCD monitor

(1) When function code F57 (LCD monitor, Item selection) = 0
The LCD monitor displays the current running status, the run command, and the date & time
(calendar clock)*. (The upper indicators show the unit of values shown on the LED monitor, and
the lower indicators, the running status and run command source.)
* If no backup battery is loaded (option for inverters of 22 kW or below), turning the power OFF resets the
calendar clock.

Running status
Run command

Date
Time

Figure 3.4-3 Display of Running Status

The running status and the run command are displayed as listed below.
Table 3.4-4 Running Status and Run Commands

Running mode display items Meaning

RUN: The inverter is running.
Running status STOP: No run command is given and the inverter is stopped.
JOG: The inverter is jogging.
FWD: Run forward command entered.
Run commands REV: Run reverse command entered.
Blank: The inverter is stopped.

3-54
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

(2) When function code F57 (LCD monitor, Item selection) = 1

The LCD monitor displays the motor speed, output current, and torque command in a bar chart.
(The upper indicators show the unit of the value shown on the LED monitor, and the lower
indicators, the running status and run command source.)

Chap. 3
Motor speed
Bar chart
Output current
Torque command

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

The full scale (maximum value) for each parameter is as follows:
Motor speed: Maximum frequency
Output current: 200% of motor rating
Torque command: 200% of motor rating

Figure 3.4-4 Bar Chart

3-55
3.4.3.3 Monitoring the running status on the LED monitor
The items listed below can be monitored on the 7-segment LED monitor. Immediately after the power
is turned ON, the monitor item specified by function code F55 is displayed.
Pressing the key in Running mode switches between monitor items in the sequence shown in Table
3.4-5.
Table 3.4-5 Monitor Items
Page LED monitor Digital setting mode
Unit Resolution
# Running Stopped Digital speed setting PID command
0 MOTOR SPEED 1 *1 REFERENCE SPEED 4 *1 r/min 0 to 9999:
resolution 1
1 REFERENCE SPEED 4 *1 r/min 10000 to 30000:
10
0.1 to 400.0:
2 OUTPUT FREQUENCY Hz
resolution 0.1
3 REFERENCE TORQUE CURRENT % 1%
4 REFERENCE MOTOR TORQUE % 1%
5 CAL MOTOR TORQUE *2 % 1%
Speed command 0.01 to 99.99:
from keypad F60 = 0 (kW)
6 MOTOR OUTPUT POWER (kW) 0.01
F60 = 1 (HP)
100.0 to 999.9:
7 OUTPUT CURRENT A 0.1
1000 or above : 1
8 OUTPUT VOLTAGE V 1V
9 DC LINK VOLTAGE V 1V
10 REFERENCE MAGNETIC FLUX % 1%
11 CAL MAGNETIC FLUX % 1%
12 MOTOR TEMPERATURE *3 - 1
Load speed command
13 LOAD SHAFT SPEED *4 LOAD SHAFT SPEED *4 r/min 1
from keypad
14 LINE SPEED *4 LINE SPEED *4 m/min 1
15 Ai (12) ADJUSTMENT PID command % 0.1%
16 Ai (Ai1) ADJUSTMENT from keypad % 0.1%
17 Ai (Ai2) ADJUSTMENT % 0.1%
18 Ai (Ai3) ADJUSTMENT *5 % 0.1%
19 Ai (Ai4) ADJUSTMENT *5 % 0.1%
20 PID REFERENCE *6 0.00 to ±9.99:
21 PID FEEDBACK *6 0.01
-
10.0 to ±99.9: 0.1
22 PID OUTPUT *6
100 to ±999: 1
23 OPTION MONITOR 1 (hex.) *7 in hexadecimal 1
24 OPTION MONITOR 2 (hex.) *7 in hexadecimal 1
Speed command
25 OPTION MONITOR 3 (dec.) *7 from keypad in decimal 1, x 10
26 OPTION MONITOR 4 (dec.) *7 in decimal 1, x 10
27 OPTION MONITOR 5 (dec.) *7 in decimal 1, x 10
28 OPTION MONITOR 6 (dec.) *7 in decimal 1, x 10
29 - - -
30 LOAD FACTOR *1 % 1%
0.01 to 99.99:
0.01
F60 = 0 (kW)
31 INPUT POWER 100.0 to 999.9:
F60 = 1 (HP) 0.1
1000 or above : 1
WATT-HOUR
32 kWh 0.1
(Display value = Input watt-hour (kWh)/100)
*1 Shown as an absolute value.
*2 Under vector control, the inverter outputs the torque value to which the compensation for motor loss (iron loss) is added.
*3 "---" appears when no NTC thermistor is used.
*4 Limited to a maximum of 60,000 in display.
*5 Not shown when no AIO option is mounted.
*6 Not shown when the PID control is disabled.
*7 Shown or not shown, depending upon application. Option monitors 5 and 6 have a sign; option monitors 3 and 4 have not.

3-56
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

The LCD monitor (given below) shows information related to the item shown on the LED monitor.
The monitor item on the LED monitor can be switched by pressing the key.

Monitor page #
Item to be monitored

Chap. 3
Operation guide

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Figure 3.4-5 LCD Monitor Sample Detailed for the LED Monitor Item

3.4.3.4 Jogging (inching) the motor

To start jogging operation, perform the following procedure.
(1) Make the inverter ready to jog with the steps below.
1) Switch the inverter to Running mode.
2) Press the " + keys" simultaneously. The lower indicator above the "JOG" index comes
ON.
(2) Jog the motor.
While the or key is held down, the motor continues jogging. Releasing the key decelerates
the motor to stop.
(3) Make the inverter exit from the ready-to-jog state and return to the normal operation state.
Press the " + keys" simultaneously. The lower indicator above the "JOG" index goes OFF.

Running status
Run forward command

Date
Time

Figure 3.4-6 Display of Jogging Mode

3-57
3.4.3.5 Monitoring light alarms
The inverter identifies abnormal states in two categories--Heavy alarm and Light alarm. If the former
occurs, the inverter immediately trips; if the latter occurs, the inverter shows the l-al on the LED
monitor and blinks the "L-ALARM" indication in the operation guide area on the LCD monitor but it
continues to run without tripping.
Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm ("Light alarm" object) should be defined with
function codes H106 to H111 beforehand.
Assigning the L-ALM signal to any one of the general-purpose, digital output terminals with any of
function codes E15 to E27 (data = 57) enables the inverter to output the L-ALM signal on that terminal
upon occurrence of a light alarm.

Means that a light alarm

has occurred.

Rotation direction

Running status
Indicator indexes
Date
Means that a light
alarm has occurred.

Figure 3.4-7 Display of Light Alarm

For details of the light alarm factors, refer to Chapter 13 "TROUBLESHOOTING."

„ How to check a light alarm factor

If a light alarm occurs, l-al appears on the LED monitor. To check the current light alarm factor,
switch to Programming mode by pressing the key and select LALM1 on Menu #5 "Maintenance
Information." For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information, refer to Section
3.4.4.6 "Reading maintenance information."
It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms by selecting LALM2 (last) to
LALM4 (3rd last).

3-58
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

„ How to remove the current light alarm

After checking the current light alarm, to switch the LED monitor from the l-al indication back to
the running status display, press the key in Running mode. To reset a light alarm via the
communications link, use an alarm reset signal.
If the light alarm factor has been removed, the "L-ALARM" disappears and the L-ALM output signal
turns OFF. If not (e.g. DC fan lock), the l-al on the LED monitor disappears so that normal
monitoring becomes available, but the "L-ALARM" remains displayed on the LCD monitor (as shown

Chap. 3
below) and the L-ALM output signal remains ON.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

The l-al has disappeared
and the normal LED monitor
is displayed.

Rotation direction

Running status
Indicator indexes
Date
The operation guide
remains displayed.

3-59
3.4.4 Programming mode
Programming mode allows you to set and check function code data and monitor maintenance
information and input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can be easily selected with a
menu-driven system. Table 3.4-6 lists menus available in Programming mode.

Table 3.4-6 Menus Available in Programming Mode

Refer to
Menu # Menu Used to:
Section:
Selecting language Change the display language on the LCD monitor.
0 3.4.4.1
(LANGUAGE)
Configuring function codes Display and change the data of the function code selected.
1 3.4.4.2
(DATA SET)
Display a function code and its data on the same screen. Also
Checking function code data
2 this menu is used to change the function code data or check 3.4.4.3
(DATA CHECK)
whether the data has been changed from the factory default.
Monitoring the running status Display the running information required for maintenance or
3 3.4.4.4
(OPR MNTR) test running.
Checking I/O signal status Display external interface information.
4 3.4.4.5
(I/O CHECK)
Reading maintenance information Display maintenance information including cumulative run
5 3.4.4.6
(MAINTENANCE) time.
Measuring load factor Measure the maximum output current, average output current,
6 3.4.4.7
(LOAD FCTR) and average braking power.
Display recent four alarm codes. Also this menu is used to view
Reading alarm information
7 the information on the running status at the time the alarm 3.4.4.8
(ALM INF)
occurred.
Viewing causes of alarm Display the cause of the alarm.
8 3.4.4.9
(ALM CAUSE)
Reading communications (Available soon.)
9 information -
(COMM INFO)
Copying data Read or write function code data, as well as verifying it.
10 3.4.4.10
(DATA COPY)
Checking changed function codes Display only the function code data that has been changed from
11 3.4.4.11
(CHANGES) the factory default.
Setting the calendar clock Display/hide the date and time and adjust the display format and
12 3.4.4.12
(DATE/TIME) data.
Compatibility with conventional Not supported.
13 inverter models -
(FORMER INV)
Limiting function codes to be • Select whether to display all function codes or limited ones
14 displayed (selected in Loader). 3.4.4.13
(LIMITED FC) • Cancel the directory structure of function codes.

3-60
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

The screen transition and hierarchy structure in Running and Programming modes are shown below.

Programming mode

Digital speed setting

Chap. 3
＜ＤＩＧ．ＳＥＴ　ＳＰ＞
　　　　　　　　ＨＡＮＤ
０～１８００
Ｆ／Ｄ　ＳＴＯＲＥ

０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ Refer to Section 3.4.4.1 for details.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

／ or

１．ＤＡＴＡ　ＳＥＴ Refer to Section 3.4.4.2 for details.

Running mode
(Initial screen at startup)
When F57 = 0
Select menu
ＳＴＯＰ ０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ
２．ＤＡＴＡ　ＣＨＥＣＫ Refer to Section 3.4.4.3 for details.
２０１０／０１／１５
１６：２３：４５ １．ＤＡＴＡ　ＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡ　ＣＨＥＣＫ
３．ＯＰＲ　ＭＮＴＲ
When F57 = 1 ∧∨→ＭＥＮＵ　ＳＨＩＦＴ ３．ＯＰＲ　ＭＮＴＲ Refer to Section 3.4.4.4 for details.
ｒ
／ to select a menu
Ａ
％
ＳＰＤ／Ｉｏｕｔ／ＴＲＱ ４．Ｉ／Ｏ　ＣＨＥＣＫ Refer to Section 3.4.4.5 for details.

Leave for 5 sec.

or
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣ Refer to Section 3.4.4.6 for details.

Select LED monitor

６．ＬＯＡＤ　ＦＣＴＲ Refer to Section 3.4.4.7 for details.
＜ＬＥＤ　ＭＮＴＲ＞　　０
ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
１６：２３：４５

７．ＡＬＭ　ＩＮＦ Refer to Section 3.4.4.8 for details.

８．ＡＬＭ　ＣＡＵＳＥ Refer to Section 3.4.4.9 for details.

０　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
／
to switch １　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
screens １０．ＤＡＴＡ　ＣＯＰＹ Refer to Section 3.4.4.10 for details.
２　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＦＲＥＱ．（ＰＲＩＭＡＲＹ　Ｈｚ．）
３　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＯＲＱＵＥ　ＣＵＲＲＥＮＴ
４　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＯＲＱＵＥ
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ Refer to Section 3.4.4.11 for details.
５　ＣＡＬ　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＯＲＱＵＥ
６　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＰＯＷＥＲ（ｋＷ）
７　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＣＵＲＲＥＮＴ　Ｉ
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ Refer to Section 3.4.4.12 for details.
８　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＶＯＬＴＡＧＥ　Ｖ
９　ＤＣ　ＬＩＮＫ　ＶＯＬＴＡＧＥ　Ｖ
１０　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ　ＭＡＧＮＥＴＩＣ　ＦＬＵＸ
１４．ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ　ＦＣ Refer to Section 3.4.4.13 for details.
１１　ＣＡＬ　ＭＡＧＮＥＴＩＣ　ＦＬＵＸ
１２　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＥＭＰＥＲＡＴＵＲＥ
１３　ＬＯＡＤ　ＳＨＡＦＴ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
１４　ＬＩＮＥ　ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５　Ａｉ（１２）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１６　Ａｉ（Ａｉ１）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１７　Ａｉ（Ａｉ２）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１８　Ａｉ（Ａｉ３）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１９　Ａｉ（Ａｉ４）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
２０　ＰＩＤ　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ
２１　ＰＩＤ　ＦＥＥＤＢＡＣＫ
２２　ＰＩＤ　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ
２３　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　１
２４　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　２
２５　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　３
２６　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　４
２７　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　５
２８　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　６

３０　ＬＯＡＤ　ＦＡＣＴＯＲ
３１　ＩＮＰＵＴ　ＰＯＷＥＲ　

３２　ＷＡＴＴ－ＨＯＵＲ

* If the screen system is password-protected, no menu can be selected until you enter the password.

3-61
„ Menu screen
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ Pressing the key in Running mode calls up the menu
１．ＤＡＴＡ ＳＥＴ screen.
２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ Select the target menu by moving the cursor (flashing
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ rectangle) with / key.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▼

„ Configuring function code data

Figure 3.4-8 shows the LCD screen transition for Menu #0 "DATA SET."
A hierarchy exists among those screens that are shifted in the order of "Menu screen," "List of function
code groups," and "List of function codes."
On the modification screen of the target function code, you can modify or check its data.

Menu screen List of function code groups List of function codes

Function code data

Figure 3.4-8 Configuration of Screens for "DATA SET" modification screens

„ Screen samples for changing function code data

The "list of function codes" shows function codes, their names, and operation guides.

Function Function code names

Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ The function code currently selected blinks, indicating that the cursor has
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ １ moved to this position (F03 blinks in this example).
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ The arrow at the right end shows that the function code has a directory
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤÆ structure.
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆ Operation guide, scrolling horizontally to display the function of each key.

Operation guides
T: This page continues to the next page.
S: This page is continued from the previous page.
¡: This page is continued from the previous page and continues to the next page.

3-62
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

The "function code data modification screen" shows the function code, its name, its data (before and
after change), allowable entry range, and operation guides.
<Before change>
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ Function code # and name
: Function code that has been changed from factory default
１５００ｒ／ｍ Data
５０～３００００ Allowable entry range

Chap. 3
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ Operation guide

<Changing data>

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ
１５００ Data before change
１２００ｒ／ｍ Data being changed
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

Figure 3.4-9 Screen Samples for Changing Function Code Data

Simultaneous keying of " + keys" switches the lower portion of the screen from the allowable
entry range to the factory default. The same simultaneous keying switches it back to the allowable
entry range.
A function code consists of an alphabet denoting a function code group and numerals.
Table 3.4-7 Function Code List

Function Code Group Function Description

F codes Fundamental
Functions to be used for basic motor running
(Fundamental functions) functions
Functions concerning the selection of operation of the control
E codes
Terminal functions circuit terminals; Functions concerning the display on the LED
(Extension terminal functions)
monitor
C codes
(Control functions of Control functions Functions associated with speed settings
frequency)
P codes Functions for configuring characteristics parameters (such as
Motor 1 parameters
(Motor 1 parameters) capacity) of the 1st motor
H codes Highly added-value functions; Functions for sophisticated
High-level functions
(High performance functions) control
A codes Motor 2 parameters Functions for configuring characteristics parameters (such as
(Motor 2, 3 parameters) Motor 3 parameters capacity) of the 2nd or 3rd motor
Functions concerning optional features
o codes
Optional functions (The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option
(Option functions)
is mounted on the inverter.)
L codes Vertical carrier
Functions to be used for vertical carrier machines
(Lift functions) machine functions
U codes User-defined
Functions to be used for UPAC option cards, etc.
(User functions) functions
SF code
Safety functions Functions concerning the safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE
(Safety functions)
S codes
Command data These function codes can be modified via the integrated RS-485
(Command functions)
interface or filedbus options (e.g., T-Link, SX-bus).
M codes The S fields are write-only and the M fields, read-only.
Monitor data
(Monitor functions)

3-63
„ Function codes requiring simultaneous keying
To modify the data for function code F00 (Data protection), H01 (Auto-tuning), H02 (Full save
function), H03 (Data initialization), H142 (Mock alarm), L01 (Password data 1) or L02 (Password
data 2), simultaneous keying of " + keys" or " + keys" is required.

„ Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the invert is running
Some function codes can be modified while the inverter is running, whereas others cannot. Further,
depending on the function code, modifications may or may not become effective immediately. For
details, refer to the "Change when running" column in Chapter 4, Section 4.2.3.

„ Keypad directory structure

The keypad has a directory structure that includes the related function codes in a directory to make it
easy to select a target function code from many function codes.
For example, function codes C01 to C04 are all related with the mechanical resonance point of the load
and treated as the same function so that C02 to C04 are not located in the parent directory. At the right
of C01, "Æ" appears indicating that C01 has a child directory. To access the child directory, move the
cursor to that function code using the and keys and then press the or key.

An example of selecting a function code with a child directory

Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１ Æ or Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－１Æ Ｃ０２ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－２
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ ２ Ｃ０３ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－３ ０ｒ／ｍ
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧ Ｎ Ｃ０４ＪＵＭＰ ＨＹＳＴＲ ０～３００００
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１ Æ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－１Æ Ｃ０２ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－２
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ ２ Ｃ０３ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－３ Save
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧ Ｎ Ｃ０４ＪＵＭＰ ＨＹＳＴＲ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ

Press three times. Press three times.

Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－１Æ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１

Ｃ２５ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ ２ Ｃ０２ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－２ Rotated back to C01.
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧ Ｎ Ｃ０３ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－３
Ｃ３０ＡＳＲ－ＪＯＧ－ＰÆ Ｃ０４ＪＵＭＰ ＨＹＳＴＲ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ

3-64
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

„ Jumping by function code group

To call up a function code in a different group (E to M), press the and keys or and keys
simultaneously to jump to the previous or next function code group.
In the case of a function code group having 100 or more function codes, this function jumps function
codes in units of 100. (For example, F00 ⇒ E01 ⇒ E101 ⇒ • • •)

Chap. 3
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ Press Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ １ Ｆ０１ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ １ four times. Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤÆ
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ Ｆ０７ＡＣＣ ＴＩＭＥ１
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤÆ Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤÆ Ｆ０８ＤＥＣ ＴＩＭＥ１
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

+
Jump to the
next group.
Ｅ１１８Ｆ－ＳＴＰ ＴＭＰ + Ｅ９０ＬＮＫ ＦＮＣ１ Æ + Ｆ８５ＴＲＱ ＦＩＬＴＥＲＦ
ＣＯ１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１ Æ Ｅ１０１Ａｉ１ＯＦＳＥＴÆ Ｅ０１Ｘ１ ＦＵＮＣ Æ
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－１Æ Ｅ１０５Ａｉ１ＢＬＩＮＤÆ Ｅ１４Ｘ ＮＯＲＭＡＬ
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ ２
Jump to Ｅ１０９ＰＬＳ ＮＵＭＥÆ
Jump to Ｅ１５Ｙ１ ＦＵＮＣ Æ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆
the next ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆
the next ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆
group. group.
Press three times.

Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１Æ + Ｅ１１８Ｆ－ＳＴＰ ＴＭＰ + Ｅ９０ＬＮＫ ＦＮＣ１ Æ

Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－１Æ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰ Ｎ１ Æ Ｅ１０１Ａｉ１ＯＦＳＥＴÆ
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ ２ Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩ Ｎ－１Æ Ｅ１０５Ａｉ１ＢＬＩＮＤÆ
Jump back Jump back
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧ Ｎ Ｃ２５ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ ２ Ｅ１０９ＰＬＳ ＮＵＭＥÆ
to the to the
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆
previous previous
group. Jump back to the
+
previous group.
Ｍ２２１ＭＯＮＩＴＲ２２Æ + Ｆ８５ＴＲＱ ＦＩＬＴＥＲＦ
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ Ｅ０１Æ
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤ ＣＭＤ １ Ｅ１４Ｘ ＮＯＲＭＡＬ
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ Jump back Ｅ１５Ｙ１ ＦＵＮＣ Æ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆ to the ∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ ◆
previous
group.

3-65
3.4.4.1 Selecting language -- Menu #0 "LANGUAGE"
Menu #0 "LANGUAGE" in Programming mode is used to select the display language from a choice
of four languages (English, Japanese, Chinese and Korean) on the LCD monitor.

０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running

１．ＤＡＴＡ ＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ
mode to switch to Programming mode.
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ
Move the cursor at the left of the screen to "0. LANGUAGE"
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▼
using the and keys. Then press the key to switch to
the language selection screen.
＜ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ＞
ÆＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ ← Japanese
ＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ ← English
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ ← Chinese
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ▼

/ Move the pointer Æ to the desired language using the and

keys.
＜ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ＞
ＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ ← Japanese
ÆＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ ← English
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ ← Chinese
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ▼
Press key to establish the selected language.
＜ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ＞
ＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ
ÆＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ▼
After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the
submenu.
＜ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ＞
ＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ
ÆＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ▼

3-66
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.2 Configuring function codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET"

Menu #1 "DATA SET" in Programming mode is used to configure function codes.
This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the data changing
flow shown below. This example shows how to change F03 data (M1 maximum speed) from 1500
r/min to 1200 r/min.

Chap. 3
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
１．ＤＡＴＡ ＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ
to switch to Programming mode. Move the cursor (flashing
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ rectangle) at the left of the screen to "1. DATA SET" using the

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▼ and keys. Then press the key to switch to the function
code configuration screen.
Ｆ．ＦＵＮＤＡＭＥＮＴＡＬ Function code groups (F, E, C, P…) appear.
Ｅ．ＴＥＲＭＩＮＡＬ
Ｃ．ＦＲＱ ＣＯＮＴＲＯＬ
Move the cursor to the desired function code group using the
Ｐ．ＭＯＴＯＲ１ and keys.
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ◆

Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ
Ｆ０１Ｎ ＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤÆ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆
Move the cursor to the desired function code using the and
keys.
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ
Ｆ０１Ｎ ＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
At the right of F03, "Æ" appears indicating that F03 has a child
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲ ＭＥＴＨＯＤ directory. To access the child directory, move the cursor to that
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤÆ function code using the and keys and then press the or
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆
key.
Press the key to move to the lower directory.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ
Ｆ０４Ｍ１―Ｎｒ
Ｆ０５Ｍ１―Ｖｒ

∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ
Press the key to establish the desired function code.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Press the key to move the cursor from the units place to the
ten-thousands place.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

Press two times. Press the key to move the cursor from the ten-thousands
place to the hundreds place.

3-67
 Press two
ti
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

/ Change the function code data using the and keys.

(In this example, change from 1500 r/min to 1200 r/min.)
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ
１５００
１２００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Press the key to establish the function code data.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ
＊ １２００ｒ／ｍ

ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ

3-68
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.3 Checking function code data -- Menu #2 "DATA CHECK"

Menu #2 "DATA CHECK" in Programming mode is used to check function codes (together with their
data) that have been changed. The function codes whose data have been changed from factory defaults
are marked with .
This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the data checking
flow shown below. This example shows how to change F03 data (M1 maximum speed) from 1500

Chap. 3
r/min to 1200 r/min.
In any of the following cases, change of function code data will be saved only into the volatile memory
(RAM) and not be saved into the non-volatile memory. Such data is displayed with white letters on

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

black background.
- After tuning, the full save function is not performed (H02 ≠ 1).
- After changing function code data via the communications link, the full save function is not
specified (H02 ≠ 1).
- When terminal command LU-CCL ("Cancel undervoltage alarm") on any X terminal is enabled,
function code data is changed.

０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
１．ＤＡＴＡ ＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ
to switch to Programming mode. Move the cursor (flashing
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ rectangle) at the left of the screen to "2. DATA CHECK" using
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▼ the and keys. Then press the key to switch to the
function code configuration screen.
Ｆ．ＦＵＮＤＡＭＥＮＴＡＬ Function code groups (F, E, C, P…) appear.
Ｅ．ＴＥＲＭＩＮＡＬ
Ｃ．ＦＲＱ ＣＯＮＴＲＯＬ
Move the cursor to the desired function code group using the
Ｐ．ＭＯＴＯＲ１ and keys.
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ◆

Ｆ００ ０：ＣＨＧ ＯＫ The function codes whose data has been changed from factory
Ｆ０１＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
Ｆ０２＊１：ＦＷＤ，ＲＥＶ
defaults are marked with an asterisk (*).
Ｆ０３ １５００ｒ／ｍ Æ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆

/ Move the cursor to the desired function code using the and
keys.
Ｆ００ ０：ＣＨＧ ＯＫ
Ｆ０１＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
At the right of F03, Æ appears indicating that F03 has a child
Ｆ０２＊１：ＦＷＤ，ＲＥＶ directory. To access the child directory, move the cursor to that
Ｆ０３ １５００ｒ／ｍ Æ function code using the and keys and then press the or
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆
key.
Press the key to move to the lower directory.
Ｆ０３ １５００ｒ／ｍ
Ｆ０４ １５００ｒ／ｍ
Ｆ０５＊１８８Ｖ

∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ
Press key to establish the desired function code.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Press the key to move the changeable digit place (blinking),
then change the function code data using the and keys.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

Press two times.

3-69
 Press two

Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ

１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ
１５００
１２００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Press key to establish the function code data.
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸ ＳＰＥＥＤ
＊ １２００ｒ／ｍ

ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ・・・

3-70
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "OPR MNTR"

Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" in Programming mode is used to check the running status during maintenance
and test running.

０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to

Chap. 3
１．ＤＡＴＡ ＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ
switch to Programming mode.
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "3.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▼ OPR MNTR" using the and keys. Then press the key.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Ｎ＊＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Reference speed
Ｎ ＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Motor speed
ｆ＊ ＝××××．×Ｈｚ ← Output frequency
ＴＲＱ＝××××．×％ ← Reference motor torque
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ １

ＴＭＰ ＝ ±×××℃ ← Motor temperature ("---" appears when no NTC thermistor is used.)
Ｉｏｕｔ＝×××．××Ａ ← Output current
Ｖｏｕｔ＝ ×××Ｖ ← Output voltage
ＦＬＸ＊＝ ×××％ ← Reference magnetic flux
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ２

（１） （２） （３） (1) Current rating (2) Speed command source (3) PID control
（４） （５） (4) Motor selected (5) Drive control
（６） （７） （８） （９） (6) Run command (7) Current limit (8) Undervoltage/Voltage limit (9) Torque limit
（１０） （１１） (10) Run command source (11) Cause of trip
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３
* For details, refer to Table 3.4-8.
/

Ｎ ＝××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Motor speed

ＬＯＤ＝××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Load shaft speed
ＬＩＮ＝××××．×ｍ／ｍ ← Line speed detection value
ＳＹ－ｄ＝ ××× ← Deviation in SY synchronous operation (This page is available soon.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ４

ＳＶ ＝×××．× ← PID command value

ＰＶ ＝×××．× ← PID feedback amount
ＭＶ ＝×××．× ← PID output value
ＩＮＴＮＬ Ｎ－ＲＥＦ ← (12) PID command source (13) PID output destination
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ５ * For details, refer to Table 3.4-8.

Ｐ ＝×××．×ｐ ← Current position pulse for position control (This page is available soon.)
Ｅ ＝×××．×ｐ ← Target position pulse for position control
ｄＰ ＝×××．×ｐ ← Current deviation pulse for position control
ＭＯＤＥ： ← Position control status
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ６

3-71
 /

Ｐ４ ＝×××××××ｐ ← 4-multiplied, current position pulse for position control (This page is available soon.)
Ｅ４ ＝×××××××ｐ ← 4-multiplied, target position pulse for position control
ｄｐ４＝×××××××ｐ ← 4-multiplied, current deviation pulse for position control
ＭＯＤＥ： ← Position control status
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ７

ＥＴＩ１＝ ×××％ ← Remaining allowance for M1 motor overload (When it counts down to 0%, OL1 alarm is
ＥＴＩ２＝ ×××％ issued.)
ＥＴＩ３＝ ×××％ ← Remaining allowance for M2 motor overload (When it counts down to 0%, OL1 alarm is
issued.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ８ ← Remaining allowance for M3 motor overload (When it counts down to 0%, OL1 alarm is
issued.)

3-72
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

Table 3.4-8 Running Status Items

Symbol Item Description
(1) HD Current rating HD (High Duty) mode selected (F80 = 0, 2)
MD MD (Medium Duty) mode selected (F80 = 3)
LD LD (Low Duty) mode selected (F80 = 1)
(2) HAND Speed command source Keypad
12± Voltage input on terminal [12] (with polarity)

Chap. 3
12 Voltage input on terminal [12] (without polarity)
U/D1 UP/DOWN control (Default = 0)
U/D2 UP/DOWN control (Default = Previous value)
U/D3 UP/DOWN control (Default = CPR1, 2)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

MULTI Terminal command SS8, SS4, SS2, SS1 ("Select multistep speed")
LINK Terminal command LE ("Enable communications link via RS-485 or
fieldbus")
H30: Communications Link Function (Mode selection)
PTI Terminal command SYC ("Synchronization command") enabled
LOCK Terminal command LOCK ("Servo-lock command")
JOG Jogging speed
LDR "FRENIC-VG Loader"
AI-V Voltage input on analog input terminal AI-V
AI-C Current input on analog input terminal AI-C
LOCAL Keypad in local mode
(3) ---- PID control PID control disabled
PID PID control enabled
(4) M1 Motor selected Motor 1 selected
M2 Motor 2 selected
M3 Motor 3 selected
(5) PG_V Drive control Vector control with speed sensor
SENS_LES Vector control without speed sensor
EMU Simulation mode
PMPG Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor
V/F V/f control for IM
MW_PGV_M Vector control for IM with speed sensor (Multiwinding motor) (Master)
MW_PGV_S Vector control for IM with speed sensor (Multiwinding motor) (Slave)
MW_LES_M Vector control for IM without speed sensor (Multiwinding motor)(Master)
(6) ---- Run command Both Run forward and Run reverse commands being OFF or ON
FWD Run forward command
REV Run reverse command
(7) ---- Current limit No current limit
IL Current limiting
(8) ---- Undervoltage Neither undervoltage nor voltage limited
LU Voltage limit Undervoltage detected
VL Voltage limited
(9) ---- Torque limit No torque limit
TL Torque limiting
(10) HAND Run command source Keypad (F02 = 0)
TERM External signals to terminals [FWD] and [REV] (F02 = 1)
COMM Via communications link
LOCAL Keypad in Local mode
(11) ---- Cause of trip No cause of trip
STP1 Input on STOP1 terminal
STP2 Input on STOP2 terminal
STP3 Input on STOP3 terminal
BX Coast to a stop
(12) INTL PID command source Internal speed command
AI Analog input
LINK Communications link
KP-ON Terminal command KP/PID ON ("Cancel PID control")
(13) ---- PID output usage PID output disabled
T-LIM Torque limiter
T-REF Torque command
N-REF Speed command
N-AUX Auxiliary speed (e.g., dancer control)

3-73
3.4.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O CHECK"
Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" in Programming mode is used to check the I/O states of digital and analog
signals during maintenance or test running.

１．ＤＡＴＡ ＳＥＴ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ
switch to Programming mode.
４．Ｉ／Ｏ ＣＨＥＣＫ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "4.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▼ I/O CHECK" using the and keys. Then press the key.

ＲＥＭ □×２ □×６ Digital input signals at the control circuit terminal block
□ＦＷＤ □×３ □×７ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
□Ｘ１ □×５ □×９ Normal open/close settings of X terminals specified by function code E14 are reflected
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ １ to these signals.
/

ＲＥＭ Digital input signals at the control circuit terminal block

□ＥＮ１ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＥＮ２

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ２

ＣＯＭＭ □×２ □×６ Digital input signals via communications link

□ＦＷＤ □×３ □×７ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
□Ｘ１ □×５ □×９
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３

□Ｙ１ □Ｙ５Ａ Output signals from transistors at the control circuit terminal block
□Ｙ２ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□Ｙ３
□Ｙ４
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ４

/ Analog input signals at the control circuit terminal block

１２ ＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog input signal (12)
Ａｉ１＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog input signal (Ai1)
Ａｉ２＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog input signal (Ai2) (voltage/current)
The unit of Ai2 can be switched between V and mA by function code E50.
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ５ When E50 ≠ 26, the unit is V and when E50 = 26, mA.

/ Analog output signals at the control circuit terminal block

ＡＯ１＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog output signal (Ao1)
ＡＯ２＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog output signal (Ao2)
ＡＯ３＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog output signal (Ao3)

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ６

□ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ ← This screen is FWD: Forward NUV: DC link bus ACC: Accelerating
□ＲＥＶ□ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ used to check the operation voltage DEC: Decelerating
□ＥＸＴ□ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ inverter running REV: Reverse established ALM: Alarm output
□ＩＮＴ□ＶＬ □ＡＬＭ status. operation TL: Torque limiting (for any fault)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ７ …: Signal OFF, EXT: Pre-exciting VL: Voltage limiting
„: Signal ON INT: Inverter shut IL: Current limiting
/ off
BRK: Braking

3-74
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

□ＰＡＲＡ１□Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ ← Indicates currently PARA1: ASR1 being selected M1: Motor 1 selected JOG: Jogging mode
□ＰＡＲＡ２□Ｍ２ effective sets. PARA2: ASR2 being selected M2: Motor 2 selected
□ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３ …: Signal OFF, „: PARA3: ASR3 being selected M3: Motor 3 selected
□ＰＡＲＡ４ Signal ON PARA4: ASR4 being selected
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ８

Chap. 3
/

ＯＰＴＩＯＮ ← Indicates the For the display content of (1) to (3), refer to the instruction manual of the
Ａ：（１） mounting status of corresponding option.
Ｂ：（２） the control options.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Ｃ：（３）
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ９

ＯＰＴＩＯＮ ← Indicates the For the display content of (4) to (6), refer to the instruction manual of the
Ｄ：（４） mounting status of corresponding option.
Ｅ：（５） the control options.
Ｆ：（６）
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１０

Ａｉ３＝±××．×Ｖ ← Indicates the I/O AIO I/O status 1 (Ai3) "0.0" when no AIO is connected
Ａｉ４＝±××．×Ｖ status of the AIO AIO I/O status 2 (Ai4) "0.0" when no AIO is connected
ＡＯ４＝±××．×Ｖ option. AIO I/O status 3 (Ao4)
ＡＯ５＝±××．×Ｖ (This page appears AIO I/O status 4 (Ao5)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１４ by mounting the
AIO option card
/ OPC-VG1-AIO.)
ＳＤ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ ← Indicates the PG [1] Input info of inverter PG signal: This appears when no PG (SD) is
ＬＤ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ signal input on the connected.
ＰＲ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ inverter. Input info of PG (SD) signal: This appears when a PG (SD) is
ＰＤ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ
mounted.
[2] Input info of PG (LD) signal: "---" appears when no PG (LD) is
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１５
connected.
/ [3] Input info of PG (PR) signal: "---" appears when no PG (PR) is
connected.
[4] Input info of PG (PD) signal: "---" appears when no PG (PD) is
Ｒ□×１１ Ｃ□×１１ ← Indicates the input connected.
□×１２ □×１２ status of the DIOA
□×１３ □×１３ option.
□×１４ □×１４ …: Signal OFF, „:
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１６ Signal ON
(This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to the
/
DIOA position.)
□Ｙ１１ □Ｙ１５ ← Indicates the output status of the DIOA option.
□Ｙ１２ □Ｙ１６ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□Ｙ１３ □Ｙ１７ (This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to the
□Ｙ１４ □Ｙ１８ DIOA position.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１７

□ＤＩＡ □ＢＣＤ □ＢＩＮ ← Indicates the input status The input statuses of the DIA and DIB options are shown in
Ａ ＝××××× of the DIA option. either of the following formats.
□ＤＩＢ □ＢＣＤ □ＢＩＮ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal Bin format: 0 to FFFF
Ｂ ＝××××× ON BCD format: 0 to 65535
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１８
(This page appears by
/ mounting the DI option
card OPC-VG1-DI.)

3-75
 /

Ｘ□２１□２５□２９□３３ ← Indicates the input status of the DIOB option.

□２２□２６□３０□３４ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□２３□２７□３１□３５ (This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to
□２４□２８□３２□３６ the DIOB position.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１９

□Ｙ２１ □Ｙ２５ □Ｙ２９ ←Indicates the output status of the DIOB option.
□Ｙ２２ □Ｙ２６ □Ｙ３０ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□Ｙ２３ □Ｙ２７ (This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to
□Ｙ２４ □Ｙ２８ the DIOB position.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ２０

□ＳＴ１ □ＳＴ２ □ＲＥ ← Indicates the I/O status of the SAFE option.
□ＳＬ１ □ＳＬ２ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＳＢ＋ □ＳＢ－ (Available soon)
□ＢＦ１ □ＢＦ２ (This page appears by mounting the functional safety option card OPC-VG1-SAFE.
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ２１

3-76
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE"

Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" in Programming mode shows information necessary for performing
maintenance on the inverter.

２．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＨＥＣＫ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ
switch to Programming mode.

Chap. 3
４．Ｉ／Ｏ ＣＨＥＣＫ
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣＥ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "5.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆ MAINTENANCE" using the and keys. Then press the key.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

ＴＩＭＥ＝ ×××××ｈ ← Cumulative run time
ＥＤＣ ＝ ×××Ｖ ← DC link bus voltage
ＴＭＰＩ＝ ×××℃ ← Max. temperature inside the inverter (Refreshed every one hour.)
ＴＭＰＦ＝ ×××℃ ← Max. temperature of heat sink (Refreshed every one hour.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ １

Ｉｍａｘ＝××．××Ａ ← Max. effective current (within an hour)

ＣＡＰ ＝ ×××％ ← Main capacitor capacity

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ２

ＴＣＡＰ＝×××××ｈ ← Cumulative run time of capacitors on the printed circuit board (Refreshed every 10
（８７６００ｈ） hours)
ＴＦＡＮ＝×××××ｈ ← Estimated remaining life of the capacitor on the printed circuit board (fixed)
（８７６００ｈ） ← Cumulative run time of the cooling fan (Refreshed every 10 hours)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３ ← Estimated remaining life of the cooling fan (fixed)
/

ＮＲＫ＝（１） ← (1) Number of communication retries for keypad

ＮＲＲ＝（２） （５） ← (2) Number of communication retries, (5) Latest error code for RS-485 (See Table 3.4-9.)
ＮＲＯ＝（３） （６） ← (3) Number of communication retries, (6) Latest error code for T-Link/CC-Link/SX-bus
ＮＲＬ＝（４） （７） ← (4) Number of communication retries, (See Table 3.4-10.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ４ (7) Latest error code for high-speed serial communication dedicated terminal block
/ (Available soon)

ＭＡＩＮ＝Ｈ１×××× ← ROM version of main control CPU (MAIN)

ＭＴＲ ＝Ｈ２×××× ← ROM version of motor control CPU (MTR)
ＫＰ ＝Ｋ ×××× ← ROM version of keypad (KP)

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ５

ＯＰ_Ａ ＝Ｑ１×××× ← ROM version of 8-bit digital option CPU (OP1)

ＯＰ_Ｂ ＝Ｑ１×××× ← ROM version of 8-bit digital option CPU (OP2)
ＯＰ_Ｄ ＝Ｑ３×××× ← ROM version of 16-bit digital option CPU

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ６ "----" when no option is mounted.

/

ＯＰ_Ｃ ＝Ｑ２×××× ← ROM version (Not used.)

ＯＰ_Ｅ ＝Ｑ４×××× ← ROM version of functional safety card option CPU-S1 (Available soon)
＝Ｑ５×××× ← ROM version of functional safety card option CPU-S2 (Available soon)
"----" when no option is mounted.
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ７

3-77
Ｗｈ ＝××××××ｋＷｈ ← Input watt-hour
ＰＤ ＝ ×××× ← Input watt-hour data
ＲＥＭＮ＝××××× ← Remaining startup times before the next maintenance
ＲＥＭＴ＝××××０ｈ ← Remaining time before the next maintenance
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ８

ＴＮＰＩＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Temperature inside the inverter (real-time value)

ＴＮＰＦＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Temperature of heat sink (real-time value)
ＣＡＰＥＨ＝××××０ｈ ← Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor (elapsed hours) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
ＣＡＰＲＨ＝××××０ｈ ← Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor (remaining hours) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ９

ＮＳＴ１ ＝××××× ← Number of startups 1 (1st motor) These counters work when H82 ≠ 0.
ＮＳＴ２ ＝××××× ← Number of startups 2 (2nd motor)
ＮＳＴ３ ＝××××× ← Number of startups 3 (3rd motor)

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１０

ＭＴＩＭ１＝××××０ｈ ← Cumulative run time (1st motor) (Refreshed every 10 hours)

ＭＴＩＭ２＝××××０ｈ ← Cumulative run time (2nd motor) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
ＭＴＩＭ３＝××××０ｈ ← Cumulative run time (3rd motor) (Refreshed every 10 hours)

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１１

ＬＡＬＭ１＝××× ← Light alarm (1) -- Latest

*Shutting down the power clears light alarm history.
ＬＡＬＭ２＝××× ← Light alarm (2) -- Last
ＬＡＬＭ３＝××× ← Light alarm (3) -- 2nd last
ＬＡＬＭ４＝××× ← Light alarm (4) -- 3rd last
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１５

Table 3.4-9 List of RS-485 Error Codes

Display # When function code M26 is: Error content

-- 0 No error
74 Format error
01
75 Command error
02 78 Function code error
03 80 Data error
04 71 Checksum error, CRC error
05 72 Parity error
06 73 Overrun error, framing error
76 Communications link priority error
07 79 Write-protected
81 Error during writing

Table 3.4-10 List of Bus Error Codes

The following display numbers are shown as a bus error code.
Display # Upper digits (T-Link) Upper digits (CC-Link) Lower digits (SX-bus)
-- No error No error No error
1 CRC check error Light alarm: Communications
Flag error data error
2 Transmission cycle timeout Light alarm (CC-Link error) Heavy alarm 1: Wire break
Frequent CRC errors
(16 time or more)
3 Overrun, underrun Heavy alarm (option error) Heavy alarm 2: Hardware
defective, Mounting failure

3-78
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.7 Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR"

Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR" in Programming mode is used to measure the maximum output current, the
average output current, and the average braking power.

３．ＯＰＲ ＭＮＴＲ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
４．Ｉ／Ｏ ＣＨＥＣＫ
to switch to Programming mode.

Chap. 3
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣ
６．ＬＯＡＤ ＦＣＴＲ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆ "6. LOAD FCTR" using the and keys. Then press the
key.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Ｔ＝３６００ｓ ← Measurement period
Ｉｍａｘ ＝ ０．００Ａ
Ｉａｖｅ＝ ０．００Ａ
ＢＰａｖｅ＝ ０％
∧∨ÆＣＡＬＣ ＴＩＭＥ
Change the measurement period using the , and keys.
Ｔ＝３６００ｓ
Ｉｍａｘ ＝ ０．００Ａ
Ｉａｖｅ＝ ０．００Ａ
ＢＰａｖｅ＝ ０％
∧∨ÆＣＡＬＣ ＴＩＭＥ

Ｔ＝ ６００ｓ ← Measurement period (600 seconds)

Ｉｍａｘ ＝ ０．００Ａ
Ｉａｖｅ＝ ０．００Ａ
ＢＰａｖｅ＝ ０％
∧∨ÆＣＡＬＣ ＴＩＭＥ
Press the key to start measurement.
Ｔ＝ １５０ｓ ← Indicates the remaining measurement period. When this value comes to zero,
Ｉｍａｘ ＝ ０．００Ａ measurement is completed.
Ｉａｖｅ＝ ０．００Ａ
ＢＰａｖｅ＝ ０％
∧∨ÆＣＡＬＣ ＴＩＭＥ

Ｔ＝３６００ｓ ← Reverts to the initial value.

Ｉｍａｘ ＝ ５６．４Ａ ← Maximum current
Ｉａｖｅ＝ ２３．５Ａ ← Average current
ＢＰａｖｅ＝ １０％ ← Average braking power (motor rated output/100%)
∧∨ÆＣＡＬＣ ＴＩＭＥ

3-79
3.4.4.8 Reading alarm information -- Menu #7 "ALM INF"
Menu #7 "ALM INF" in Programming mode shows the past four alarm codes and the related alarm
information on the current inverter conditions detected when the alarm occurred.

４．Ｉ／Ｏ ＣＨＥＣＫ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣＥ
６．ＬＯＡＤ ＦＣＴＲ
to switch to Programming mode.
７．ＡＬＭ ＩＮＦ
Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆
"7. ALM INF" using the and keys. Then press the key.

０／１＝（１）（５）（９） ← (1) Latest alarm code (5) Latest alarm, ID (9) Latest alarm, no. of occurrences (always 1)
－１＝（２）（６）（１０） ← (2) 1st last alarm code (6) 1st last alarm, ID (10) 1st last alarm, no. of occurrences
－２＝（３）（７）（１１） ← (3) 2nd last alarm code (7) 2nd last alarm, ID (11) 2nd last alarm, no. of occurrences
－３＝（４）（８）（１２） ← (4) 3rd last alarm code (8) 3rd last alarm, ID (12) 3rd last alarm, no. of occurrences
∧∨ÆＨＩＳＴＯＲＹ ＳＨＩＦ Alarm ID: Blank (Alarm caused by the inverter), Ｏ (Alarm caused by multiplex system or other inverters)

/ Use the and keys to select the desired alarm.

０／１＝（１）（５）（９）
－１＝（２）（６）（１０）
－２＝（３）（７）（１１）
－３＝（４）（８）（１２）
∧∨ÆＨＩＳＴＯＲＹ ＳＨＩＦ
Press the key to establish the selected alarm.
ＯＣＣＵＲＲＥＤ ＡＴ
２０１１／０１／０１ ← Date when an alarm occurred
００：００：００ ← Time when an alarm occurred
Note: To record accurate date and time, it is necessary to mount a memory backup battery
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ １ (Option for inverters of up to 22 kW, Attached as standard for those of 30 kW or above)
and adjust the date and time.
/

ＲＥＳＥＴ ＡＴ
２０１１／０１／０１ ← Date when an alarm was removed
００：００：１０ ← Time when an alarm was removed
Note: To record accurate date and time, it is necessary to mount a memory backup battery
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ２ (Option for inverters of up to 22 kW, Attached as standard for those of 30 kW or above)
and adjust the date and time.
/

Ｎ＊＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Speed setting 4 upon the occurrence of alarm The value is rounded to the
Ｎ ＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Detected speed 1 upon the occurrence of alarm first decimal place.
ｆ＊ ＝ ×××．×Ｈｚ ← Reference output frequency upon the occurrence of alarm If the absolute value of the
ＴＲＱ＝ ×××％ ← Reference torque upon the occurrence of alarm detected speed is 10,000 or
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３ larger, the value is rounded to
an integer.
/

ＴＭＰ ＝ ±×××℃ ← Motor temperature upon the occurrence of alarm ("---" appears when no NTC is mounted)
Ｉｏｕｔ＝×××．××Ａ ← Detected output current upon the occurrence of alarm
Ｖｏｕｔ＝ ×××Ｖ ← Detected output voltage upon the occurrence of alarm
ＦＬＸ＊＝ ×××％ ← Reference magnetic-flux value upon the occurrence of alarm
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ４

ＴＩＭＥ＝ ×××××ｈ ← Cumulative operation hours upon the occurrence of alarm

Ｍｏｕｔ＝ ×××．×ｋＷ ← Reference motor output (in kW or HP) upon the occurrence of alarm *
ＴＭＰＩＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Inverter inside air temperature upon the occurrence of alarm (real-time value)
ＴＭＰＦＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Heat sink temperature upon the occurrence of alarm (real-time value)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ５ * kW or HP can be selected with code F60.
/

3-80
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

ＥＤＣ ＝ ×××Ｖ ← DC link bus voltage at the time of an alarm

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ６

Chap. 3
/

ＮＲＫ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for keypad

ＮＲＲ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for RS-485
ＮＲＯ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for T-Link/CC-Link/SX-bus

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

ＮＲＬ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for high-speed serial
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ７ communication dedicated terminal block

ＲＥＭ □Ｘ２ □Ｘ６ (Terminal block)

□ＦＷＤ □Ｘ３ □Ｘ７ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □Ｘ４ □Ｘ８
□Ｘ１ □Ｘ５ □Ｘ９
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ８

ＲＥＭ (Terminal block)

□ＥＮ１ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＥＮ２

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ ９

ＣＯＭＭ □Ｘ２ □Ｘ６ (Via communications link)

□ＦＷＤ □Ｘ３ □Ｘ７ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □Ｘ４ □Ｘ８
□Ｘ１ □Ｘ５ □Ｘ９
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１０

/
□Ｙ１ □Ｙ５Ａ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□Ｙ２
□Ｙ３
□Ｙ４
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１１

□ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON

□ＲＥＶ□ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ FWD: Forward operation NUV: DC link bus voltage established (ready for operation)
□ＥＸＴ□ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ REV: Reverse operation TL: Torque limiting DEC: Decelerating
□ＩＮＴ□ＶＬ □ＡＬＭ EXT: Pre-exciting VL: Voltage limiting ALM: Alarm output (for any fault)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１２ INT: Inverter shut off IL: Current limiting
BRK: Braking ACC: Accelerating
/
Ｒ□Ｘ１１ Ｃ□Ｘ１１ (Shown only when DIO option is mounted)
□Ｘ１２ □Ｘ１２ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□Ｘ１３ □Ｘ１３ (R: Terminal block, C: Via communications link)
□Ｘ１４ □Ｘ１４
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１３

3-81
 /

□Ｙ１１ □Ｙ１５ (Shown only when DIO option is mounted)

□Ｙ１２ □Ｙ１６ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□Ｙ１３ □Ｙ１７
□Ｙ１４ □Ｙ１８
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１４

５＝ (1) ← Multiple alarms 5 ((1) = Alarm code)

４＝ (2) ← Multiple alarms 4 ((2) = Alarm code)
３＝ (3) ← Multiple alarms 3 ((3) = Alarm code)
２＝ (4) ← Multiple alarms 2 ((4) = Alarm code)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１６

/
（１） （２） （３） (1) Current rating (2) Speed command source (3) PID control
（４） （５） (4) Motor selected (5) Drive control
（６） （７） （８） （９） (6) Run command (7) Current limit (8) Undervoltage/Voltage limit (9) Torque limit
（１０） （１１） (10) Run command source (11) Cause of trip
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ１９ * For details, refer to Table 3.4-8.

ＮＳＴ１ ＝ｘｘｘｘｘ ← Number of startups 1 (1st motor)

ＮＳＴ２ ＝ｘｘｘｘｘ ← Number of startups 2 (2nd motor)
ＮＳＴ３ ＝ｘｘｘｘｘ ← Number of startups 3 (3rd motor)

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ２０

ＴＲＱＩ＝ｘｘ．ｘｘ％ ← Reference torque current at the time of an alarm

ＴＲＯ ＝ｘｘ．ｘｘ％ ← Calculated torque at the time of an alarm
ＴＲＯＩ＝ｘｘ．ｘｘ％ ← Calculated torque current at the time of an alarm
Ｐ ＝ｘｘｘｘｘｋＷ ← Input power at the time of an alarm
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ２１

□ＳＴ１ □ＳＴ２ □ＲＥ ← Indicates the I/O status of the SAFE option.
□ＳＬ１ □ＳＬ２ …: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
□ＳＢ＋ □ＳＢ－ (Available soon)
□ＢＦ１ □ＢＦ２
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ２２

/
ＳＵＢ＝ｘｘｘｘ ← Alarm sub-code (for manufacturers)
ＡＬ＝××× ＡＬ＝××× ← Alarm whose cause is not removed yet (for the latest alarm only)
ＡＬ＝××× ＡＬ＝×××

∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦＴ２３

3-82
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.9 Viewing causes of alarm -- Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE"

Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE" in Programming mode shows the past four alarm codes and the related
alarm information on the current inverter conditions detected when the alarm occurred.

５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
６．ＬＯＡＤ ＦＣＴＲ
to switch to Programming mode.

Chap. 3
７．ＡＬＭ ＩＮＦ
８．ＡＬＭ ＣＡＵＳＥ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆ "8. ALM CAUSE" using the and keys. Then press the
key.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

５＝(37) ← (37) Multiple alarms, 4th
４＝(36) ← (36) Multiple alarms, 3rd
３＝(35) ← (35) Multiple alarms, 2nd
２＝(34) ← (34) Multiple alarms, 1st
０／１＝（１）（５）（９） ← (1) Latest alarm code (5) Latest alarm, ID (9) Latest alarm, no. of occurrences (always 1)
－１＝（２）（６）（１０） ← (2) 1st last alarm code (6) 1st last alarm, ID (10) 1st last alarm, no. of occurrences
－２＝（３）（７）（１１） ← (3) 2nd last alarm code (7) 2nd last alarm, ID (11) 2nd last alarm, no. of occurrences
－３＝（４）（８）（１２） ← (4) 3rd last alarm code (8) 3rd last alarm, ID (12) 3rd last alarm, no. of occurrences
∧∨ÆＨＩＳＴＯＲＹ ＳＨＩＦ
－４＝(13) (20) (27) ← (13) 4th last alarm code (20) 4th last alarm, ID (27) 4th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－５＝(14) (21) (28) ← (14) 5th last alarm code (21) 5th last alarm, ID (28) 5th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－６＝(15) (22) (29) ← (15) 6th last alarm code (22) 6th last alarm, ID (29) 6th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－７＝(16) (23) (30) ← (16) 7th last alarm code (23) 7th last alarm, ID (30) 7th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－８＝(17) (24) (31) ← (17) 8th last alarm code (24) 8th last alarm, ID (31) 8th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－９＝(18) (25) (32) ← (18) 9th last alarm code (25) 9th last alarm, ID (32) 9th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－１０＝(19) (26) (33) ← (19) 10th last alarm code (26) 10th last alarm, ID (33) 10th last alarm, no. of occurrences

/ Use the and keys to select the desired alarm and press the
key to establish the selected alarm.
０／１＝××× ×× ××
－１＝××× ×× ××
－２＝××× ×× ××
－３＝××× ×× ××
∧∨ÆＨＩＳＴＯＲＹ ＳＨＩＦ

ＴＨＲ ＯＰＥＮ ← Indicates cause of the alarm selected from alarm history
Shown at the left is the 0h2 alarm.
If all the information for the selected alarm is not shown on the
screen at a time, scroll over the descriptive information using
the and keys.

< Alarm ID Details >

Display Function
Blank Ordinary alarm
Ｏ Alarm caused by other inverters

3-83
3.4.4.10 Copying data -- Menu #10 "DATA COPY"
Menu #10 "DATA COPY" in Programming mode provides "Read," "Write," and "Verify" functions,
enabling the following applications. The keypad can hold three sets of function code data in its internal
memory to use for three different inverters.
(a) Reading function code data already configured in an inverter and then writing that function code
data altogether into another inverter.
(b) Copying the function code data saved in the inverter memory into the keypad memory for
backup.
(c) Saving function code data in the keypad as master data for data management; that is, saving more
than one set of function code data in the keypad and writing a set of data suited to the machinery
into the target inverter.

(a) Copy (b) Backup (c) Data management

Table 3.4-11 details the data copying functions.

Table 3.4-11 List of Data Copying Functions

Operation Description
Read: Read data Reads out function code data from the inverter memory and stores it into the keypad
memory.
Write: Write data Writes the data held in the selected area of the keypad memory into the target inverter
memory.
Verify: Verify data Verifies the data held in the keypad memory against that in the inverter memory.

3-84
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to switch to Programming mode.
Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "10. DATA COPY" using the and
keys. Then press the key.
Use the and keys to select ""Read," "Write," or "Verify."

７．ＡＬＭ ＩＮＦ

Chap. 3
８．ＡＬＭ ＣＡＵＳＥ
９．ＣＯＭＭ ＩＮＦＯ
１０．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＯＰＹ
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ ＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ / ＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞
/
- - - ← ２２０－１－４ - - -← ２２０－１－４ - - -← ２２０－１－４
ＲＥＡＤ ＷＲＩＴＥ ＶＥＲＩＦＹ

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ

＜ＲＥＡＤ；ＤＡＴＡ＞ ＜ＷＲＩＴＥ；ＤＡＴＡ＞ ＜ＶＥＲＩＦＹ；ＤＡＴＡ＞

ＫＰ１：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ１：２２０－１－４ ＫＰ１：２２０－１－４
ＫＰ２：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ２：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ２：- - - - - - - -
ＫＰ３：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ３：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ３：- - - - - - - -
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ

ＳＴＡＲＴ ＣＯＰＹ？ ＭＯＴＰ（Ｐ，Ａ） ＡＲＥ ＭＯＴＰ（Ｐ，Ａ） ＡＲＥ

ＫＰ１←２２０－１－４ ＷＲＩＴＴＥＮ ＴＯＯ？ ＶＥＲＩＦＹ ＴＯＯ？
ＲＥＡＤ ÆＹＥＳ ÆＹＥＳ
ＮＯ ＮＯ
Ｆ／Ｄ→ＳＴＡＲＴ

＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ ＳＴＡＲＴ ＣＯＰＹ？ ＳＴＡＲＴ ＣＯＰＹ？

ＫＰ１←２２０－１－４ ＫＰ１Æ２２０－１－４ ＫＰ１＝２２０－１－４
ＲＥＡＤ ＷＲＩＴＥ ＶＥＲＩＦＹ

１００％ ７０８／７０８ Ｆ／ＤÆＳＴＡＲＴ Ｆ／ＤÆＳＴＡＲＴ

＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ ＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ ＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞

ＫＰ１←２２０－１－４ ＫＰ１Æ２２０－１－４ ＫＰ１＝２２０－１－４
ＲＥＡＤ ＷＲＩＴＥ ＶＥＲＩＦＹ
ＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ １００％ ９９６／９９６ １００％ ９９６／９９６

＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ ＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞
ＫＰ１Æ２２０－１－４ ＫＰ１＝２２０－１－４
ＷＲＩＴＥ ＶＥＲＩＦＹ
ＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥ ＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ／ＤÆ

3-85
3.4.4.11 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #11 "CHANGES"
Menu #11 "CHANGES" in Programming mode shows only the function codes whose data has been
changed from the factory defaults.

８．ＡＬＭ ＣＡＵＳＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running
９．ＣＯＭＭ ＩＮＦＯ
１０．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＯＰＹ
mode to switch to Programming mode.
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆ "11. CHANGES" using the and keys. Then press the
key.
Ｆ０１＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ The function codes whose data has been changed from factory
Ｆ０２＊１：ＦＷＤ，ＲＥＶ
Ｆ０３＊１２００ｒ／ｍ
defaults are marked with an asterisk (*).
Ｆ０５＊３７０Ｖ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆

Ｆ０１．ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１ Just as in Section 3.4.4.2, "Configuring function codes--Menu

＊
１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
#1 "DATA SET," the function code data can be modified.
０～９
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

/
Ｆ０１．ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
＊ １：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
２：１２－ＡＢＳ
０～９
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ

Ｆ０１．ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
＊ ２：１２－ＡＢＳ

ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ・・・

Ｆ０１＊２：１２－ＡＢＳ
Ｆ０２＊１：ＦＷＤ，ＲＥＶ
Ｆ０３＊１２００ｒ／ｍ
Ｆ０５＊３７０Ｖ
∧∨ÆＦＮ ＣＯＤＥ◆

3-86
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.4.12 Setting the calendar clock -- Menu #12 "DATE/TIME"

Menu #12 "DATE/TIME" in Programming mode is used to select the format of the calendar clock to
be displayed in the operation guide line in Running mode and set the date and time.

After mounting a memory backup battery (option for inverters of 22 kW or below, attached as standard for

Chap. 3
those of 33 kW or above), set the date and time. When a memory backup battery is not mounted, the calendar
clock does not work correctly.

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

1) Setting the date and time
９．ＣＯＭＭ ＩＮＦＯ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running
１０．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＯＰＹ
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ
mode to switch to Programming mode.
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ
Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆
"12. DATA/TIME" using the and keys. Then press the
key.
＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞
ÆＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ＦＯＲＭＡＴ

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ
Press key to establish the desired menu.
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ Use the key to move the cursor to the desired item.
２０１０／０１／０１
００：００：００

∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ ∧

/ Change the date and time using the and keys.

ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
２０１１／０１／０１
０２：４３：１５

∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡ ＡＤＪＵＳＴ ∧
If the relationship between the changed year, month, day, and
time is invalid, "CANNOT SET" appears when the key is pressed.
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
２０１１／０１／０１
ＰＭ ０２：４３：１５
ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ・・・

＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞ After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the

ÆＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ＦＯＲＭＡＴ
submenu.

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ

The calendar clock can also be set with FRENIC-VG Loader. For details, refer to the
FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual.

3-87
2) Selecting the display format

９．ＣＯＭＭ ＩＮＦＯ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
１０．ＤＡＴＡ ＣＯＰＹ
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ
switch to Programming mode.
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "12.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆ DATA/TIME" using the and keys. Then press the key.
Press key to establish the desired menu.
＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞
ÆＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ＦＯＲＭＡＴ

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ

/ Move the pointer Æ using the and keys to the desired menu.
＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ
Press key to establish the desired menu.
＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
ｙｙｙｙ／ｍｍ／ｄｄ
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ

∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ ＳＨＩＦＴ

/ Change the date format data using the and keys.

＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
<List of date formats>
ｄｄ／ｍｍ／ｙｙｙｙ ｙｙｙｙ／ｍｍ／ｄｄ Year/Month/Date
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ ｄｄ／ｍｍ／ｙｙｙｙ Date/Month/Year
ｍｍ／ｄｄ／ｙｙｙｙ Month/Date/Year
∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ ＳＨＩＦＴ ｍｍｍ ｄｄ，ｙｙｙｙ Month Date, Year
＜ＯＦＦ＞ No display
/

＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
ｍｍ／ｄｄ／ｙｙｙｙ
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ

∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ ＳＨＩＦＴ

＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
ｍｍｍ ｄｄ，ｙｙｙｙ
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ

∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ ＳＨＩＦＴ
Press key to establish the newly specified date format.
＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
ＪＡＮ ０１，２０１２
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ

3-88
 3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

/ Change the time format data using the and keys.

＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
<List of time formats>
ＪＡＮ ０１，２０１２ ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ 0-24 hour: minutes: seconds
ＡＭ ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ ＡＭ 0-12 hour: minutes: seconds AM/PM
ＡＭ ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ AM/PM 0-12 hour: minutes: seconds
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ ＜ＯＦＦ＞ No display

Chap. 3
Press key to establish the newly specified time format.
＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
ＪＡＮ ０１，２０１２
ＰＭ ０２：４３：３７

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ・・・
∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ ＳＨＩＦＴ
After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the
submenu.
＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ

∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ

3-89
3.4.4.13 Limiting function codes to be displayed -- Menu #14 "LIMITED FC"
Menu #14 "LIMITED FC" in Programming mode is used to display/hide the directory and select
whether to display all function codes or limited ones selected in Loader.
Shown below is an example of selecting limited ones.

１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ
１３．ＦＯＲＭＥＲ ＩＮＶ
switch to Programming mode.
１４．ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ ＦＣ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "14.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ◆ LIMITED FC" using the and keys. Then press the key.

＜ＦＣ ＬＩＭＩＴ＞
ÆＤＩＲＥＣＴＯＲＹ
ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ
ＡＬＬ ＦＣ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ

/ Move the pointer Æ using the and keys to the desired menu.
＜ＦＣ ＬＩＭＩＴ＞
ＤＩＲＥＣＴＯＲＹ
ÆＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ
ＡＬＬ ＦＣ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ Ｆ
Press key to select "LIMITED."
＜ＦＣ ＬＩＭＩＴ＞
ＤＩＲＥＣＴＯＲＹ
ÆＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ
ＡＬＬ ＦＣ
ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ・・・

１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the

１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ
１３．ＦＯＲＭＥＲ ＩＮＶ
submenu.
１４．ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ ＦＣ
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵ ＳＨＩＦＴ▲

3-90
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5 Test Run Procedure

Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below.

Start

Chap. 3
Check prior to powering on. → (See Section 3.5.1.)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Power ON and check. → (See Section 3.5.2.)

Select the motor drive control mode. → (See Section 3.5.3.)

Run the inverter for operation check. → (See Section 3.5.4.)

End

3-91
3.5.1 Checking prior to powering On
Check the following before powering on the inverter.
(1) Check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T and output terminals U, V,
and W. Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals ( G)
correctly. (See Figure 3.5-1.)

• Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U, V, and W. Doing so and turning the
power ON breaks the inverter.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.

(2) Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults.
(3) Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws.
(4) Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment.
(5) Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF. Powering on the
inverter with any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation.
(6) Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment, e.g., a defense to prevent
people from access to the equipment.
(7) Check that a power factor correction DC reactor (DCR) is connected to terminals P1 and P(+).
(Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW are provided together with a DCR
as standard. Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter.)
(8) Check that the PG (pulse generator) wiring is correct.

Wrong wiring may break the PG..

If the inverter is powered on with wrong wiring, disconnect the PG signal wires from the inverter, keep only
the PG powered on via the PGP and PGM, and then check that each signal is correctly output with an
oscilloscope or recorder.

Inverter

G L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) DB U V W G

PGP PGM PA PB TH1 THC

Jumper bar
PGP PGM PA PB
DCR not connected
～
～
M
PG
～ 3～

Inverter

G L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) DB U V W G

PGP PGM PA PB TH1 THC

PGP PGM PA PB

～
～
DCR connected M
PG
～ 3～

Note: In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground. If the inverter is
significantly affected by external induction noise, however, connection to 0V may be effective to
suppress the influence of noise.
Figure 3.5-1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals (Vector dedicated motor connected)

3-92
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5.2 Powering ON and checking

• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is
ON.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.

Chap. 3
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.

Turn the power ON and check the following points. The

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

following is a case when no function code data is changed
from the factory defaults.
(1) Check that the LED monitor displays 0 (indicating
that the reference speed is 0 r/min) that is blinking.
(See Figure 3.5-2.)
If the LED monitor displays any number except 0,
press / key to set 0.
(2) Check that the built-in cooling fans rotate.

Figure 3.5-2 Display of the LED Monitor at

Power-on

3.5.2.1 Checking the input state of PG (pulse generator) signals

Before proceeding to a test run of the inverter, rotate the motor shaft and check the digital input state of
PG (pulse generator) signals on the screen shown below.
To call up the screen, switch the inverter operation mode from the Running mode to the Programming
mode, select Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" on the menu screen, and select page 15 (shown below) using the
/ keys.
For detailed operation procedure, refer to Section 3.4.4.5.

ＳＤ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (SD) signal input info (inverter or option)*

ＬＤ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (LD) signal input info (option)
ＰＲ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (PR) signal input info (option)
ＰＤ ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (PD) signal input info (option)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦ１５

* When a PG (SD) option is mounted, the PG (SD) signal input info appears; when it is not, the inverter PG signal input
info appears.

3-93
3.5.2.2 Mounting direction of a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals
The forward rotational direction of the dedicated motor (MVK type) is CCW when viewed from the
motor output shaft as shown in Figure 3.5-3.
During rotation in the forward direction, the PG output pulse forms a forward rotation signal (B phase
advanced by 90 degrees) shown in Figure 3.5-4, and during rotation in the reverse direction, a reverse
rotation signal (A phase advanced by 90 degrees).
When mounting an external PG on motors other than the dedicated one, directly connect it to the motor,
using a coupling, etc.

Forward

Figure 3.5-3 Forward Rotational Direction of Motor and PG

Forward Reverse
rotation signal rotation signal

A phase input

B phase input

Figure 3.5-4 PG (Pulse Generator) Signal

3-94
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5.3 Selecting a desired motor drive control

The FRENIC-VG supports the following motor drive controls.
Data for P01 M1 drive control Speed feedback Speed control Refer to:
0 Vector control for IM with speed sensor Yes Section 3.5.3.1
1 Vector control for IM without speed sensor Estimated speed Speed control Section 3.5.3.2

Chap. 3
with automatic
speed regulator Chapter 4, Section 4.3.4
2 Simulation mode Yes
(ASR) "P codes"
3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor Yes Section 3.5.3.3

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

5 V/f control for IM No Frequency control Section 3.5.3.4

3.5.3.1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor

Under vector control, the inverter detects the motor's rotational position and speed according to PG
feedback signals and uses them for speed control. In addition, it decomposes the motor drive current
into the exciting and torque current components, and controls each of components in vector.
The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) with the speed
regulator (PI controller).
This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector
control without speed sensor.
(A recommended motor for this control is a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control.)
Vector control regulating the motor current requires some voltage margin between the
voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor. Usually a
general-purpose motor is so designed that the voltage matches the commercial power. Under
the control, therefore, it is necessary to suppress the motor terminal voltage to the lower level
in order to secure the voltage margin required.
However, driving the motor with the motor terminal voltage suppressed to the lower level
cannot generate the rated torque even if the rated current originally specified for the motor is
applied. To ensure the rated torque, it is necessary to review the rated current. (This also
applies to vector control without speed sensor.)

„ For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control

Configure the function codes as listed below. The machinery design values should match your
machinery ones.
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET." For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function
Codes."
Function Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control with speed sensor
with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM
P02 M1 Selection Motor to be applied Motor to be applied
P28 M1 PG Pulse Resolution
A30 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1024 1024
A130 M3 PG Pulse Resolution
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 1: NTC thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
F03 M2 Maximum Speed (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase 1500 r/min
M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
machinery design values. If the specified time
F07 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) 5.00 s
is short, the inverter may not run the motor
F08 Deceleration Time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s

3-95
 „ For motors except Fuji VG motor
To use motors except a Fuji VG motor when their motor parameters to be set to function codes are
known, perform auto-tuning to automatically configure them.
Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design
values. The motor ratings are printed on the motor's nameplate. For your machinery design values, ask
system designers about them.
After configuring the function codes, perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4).
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET." For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control with speed sensor
with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection (No modification is required for M2 or Motor to be applied
M3.)
P28 M1 Pulse Resolution
Match the specifications of the PG to be
A30 M2 Pulse Resolution 1024
used.
A130 M3 Pulse Resolution
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 0: No thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A05 M2 Rated Speed 1500 r/min
A105 M3 Rated Speed
Rated voltage of nominal applied
F05 M1 Rated Voltage
motors
A04 M2 Rated Voltage
80 V
A104 M3 Rated Voltage
P03 M1 Rated Capacity Capacity of nominal applied motors
Motor ratings
A02 M2 Rated Capacity (printed on the nameplate of the motor)
0.00 kW
A102 M3 Rated Capacity
Rated current of nominal applied
P04 M1 Rated Current
motors
A03 M2 Rated Current
0.01 A
A103 M3 Rated Current
P05 M1 Poles
A07 M2 Poles 4 poles
A107 M3 Poles
F03 M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
A06 M2 Maximum Speed 1500 r/min
(Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
A106 M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
F07 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
is short, the inverter may not run the motor
properly.
F08 Deceleration Time 1 (Note) 5.00 s

For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 3 or 4), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5
"H Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
3: Auto tuning with motor stopped
H01 Tuning Selection 0: Disable
4: Auto tuning with motor rotating

Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4) automatically changes the data of

function codes P06 through P11 and P15 through P21 for M1, A08 through A13 and A17
through A23 for M2, and A108 through A113 and A117 through A123 for M3. Be careful
with this data change.
After tuning, be sure to perform the full save function (H02 = 1) to save the tuned data into the
inverter.
3-96
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5.3.2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor

Under this control, the inverter estimates the motor speed based on the inverter's output voltage and
current to use the estimated speed for speed control. In addition, it controls the motor current and
motor torque with quick response and high accuracy under vector control. No PG (pulse generator) is
required.
The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) and using the

Chap. 3
speed regulator (PI controller).
Applying "vector control without speed sensor" requires auto-tuning regardless of the motor type.
(Even driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control requires auto-tuning.)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design
values. The motor ratings are printed on the motor's nameplate. For your machinery design values, ask
system designers about them.

„ For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control

Configure the function codes as listed below and perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2)
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET." For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
with speed sensor
with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection (No modification is required for M2 or Motor to be applied
M3.)
P30 M1 PG Pulse Resolution
A31 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1: NTC thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 PG Pulse Resolution
F03 M1 Thermistor Type
A06 M2 Thermistor Type Machinery design values 1500 r/min
A106 M3 Thermistor Type (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
M1 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
F07 M2 Maximum Speed machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
is short, the inverter may not run the motor
M3 Maximum Speed
properly.
F08 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) 5.00 s

For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 2), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5 "H
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
H01 Tuning Selection 2: Auto-tuning (R1, Lσ) 0: Disable

Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2) automatically changes the data of

function codes P06 and P07 for M1, A08 and A09 for M2, and A108 and A109 for M3. Be
careful with this data change.
After tuning, be sure to perform the full save function (H02 = 1) to save the tuned data into the
inverter.

3-97
 „ For motors except Fuji VG motor
Configure the function codes as listed below and perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4)
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET." For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM with speed sensor
with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection (No modification is required for M2 or Motor to be applied
M3.)
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 0: No thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A05 M2 Rated Speed 1500 r/min
A105 M3 Rated Speed
F05 M1 Rated Voltage
A04 Rated voltage of nominal applied
M2 Rated Voltage
A104 motors
M3 Rated Voltage
P03 M1 Rated Capacity Motor ratings
A02 M2 Rated Capacity Capacity of nominal applied motors
(printed on the nameplate of the motor)
A102 M3 Rated Capacity
P04 M1 Rated Current
A03 Rated current of nominal applied
M2 Rated Current
A103 motors
M3 Rated Current
P05 M1 Poles
A07 M2 Poles 4 poles
A107 M3 Poles
F03 M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
A06 M2 Maximum Speed 1500 r/min
(Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
A106 M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
F07 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
is short, the inverter may not run the motor
F08 Deceleration Time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s

For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 3 or 4), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5
"H Codes."

Functio
n Name Function code data Factory default
code
3: Auto tuning with motor stopped
H01 Tuning Selection 0: Disable
4: Auto tuning with motor rotating

Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4) automatically changes the data of

function codes P06 through P11 and P15 through P21 for M1, A08 through A13 and A17
through A23 for M2, and A108 through A113 and A117 through A123 for M3. Be careful
with this data change.
After tuning, be sure to perform the full save function (H02 = 1) to save the tuned data into the
inverter.

3-98
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5.3.3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole
position sensor
Under this control, the inverter detects the motor's rotational position, speed and magnetic pole
position according to feedback signals sent from the speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor
for speed control. In addition, it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque
current components, and controls each of components in vector.

Chap. 3
The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) with the speed
regulator (PI controller).
(A recommended motor for this control is Fuji GNF2 series exclusively designed for vector control.)

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

„ For Fuji GNF2 motor exclusively designed for vector control
Configure the function codes as listed below. The machinery design values should match your
machinery ones. For details, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET." For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 3: Vector control for PMSM 0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control with speed sensor and magnetic pole with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control position sensor 5: V/f control for IM
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection (No modification is required for M2 or Motor to be applied
M3.)
P28 M1 PG Pulse Resolution
A30 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1024 1024
A130 M3 PG Pulse Resolution
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 1: NTC thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
o09 M1 ABS Signal Input Definition Specify the absolute encoder signal
A59 M2 ABS Signal Input Definition interface according to the PG
A159 M3 ABS Signal Input Definition specifications.
For GNF2 motors, set the function code 0
data to "1."
1: 3 bits (terminals F0, F1 and F2)
U, V, W phase interface
o10 M1 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor
Offset 0.0 to 359.9
A60 M2 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor (0.0° to 359.9° CCW)
0000
Offset Use the function code to adjust the
A160 M3 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor magnetic pole position.
Offset
o11 M1 Saliency Ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
1.000 to 3.000
A61 M2 Saliency Ratio (%Xq/%Xd) 1.000
Specify the saliency ratio of PMSM.
A161 M3 Saliency Ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
F03 M2 Maximum Speed (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase 1500 r/min
M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
F07 Acceleration time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time is 5.00 s
short, the inverter may not run the motor
F08 Deceleration time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s

Since vector control for a Fuji GNF2 motor with speed sensor uses motor parameters, the
following conditions should be satisfied; otherwise, full control performance may not be
obtained.
- A single motor should be connected per inverter.
- Motor parameters are properly configured.

3-99
 Be sure to adjust the magnetic pole position (see below for the adjustment procedure):
- when the inverter runs for the first time after purchase
- after replacement of a motor, PG or inverter
Running the inverter with the magnetic pole position (o10, A60, A160) not adjusted or with the position
deviated greatly from the true value could run the motor in the opposite direction or out of control in the worst
case.
An accident or injuries could occur.

■ Adjusting the magnetic pole position

When the magnetic pole position has been adjusted at the time of shipment as requested by the user, no
adjustment is required. When the inverter is shipped without adjustment (o10 = 0.0) or a PG is
mounted or replaced at the site, check and adjust the magnetic pole position using the procedure given
below.

Manual adjustment procedure

z Configure the following parameters beforehand.
- E69 (Terminal [Ao1] Function) : 26 (U phase voltage)
- E70 (Terminal [Ao2] Function) : 39 (Magnetic pole position signal SMP)
- E84 (Ao1-5 Filter Setting) : 0.000 s (Cancel filter)

z Rotate the motor shaft by hand to check that the positional relationship between the waveforms on
Ao1 and Ao2 is as shown below. If the waveforms are greatly misaligned, adjust the data of function
code o10 to align the waveforms as shown below.

Figure 3.5-5 Adjustment of Magnetic Pole Position

Wrong connection of motor power wires or encoder wires causes a PG alarm.

3-100
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5.3.4 V/f control for IM

Under this control, the inverter drives a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V/f
pattern specified by function codes.

„ For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control

Chap. 3
Configure the function codes as listed below. The machinery design values should match your
machinery ones.
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM
P02 M1 Selection Motor to be applied Motor to be applied
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
1: NTC thermistor
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 1: NTC thermistor
(Specify the thermistor as needed.)
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A05 M2 Rated Speed 1500 r/min
A105 M3 Rated Speed
F05 M1 Rated Voltage Rated voltage of nominal applied
motors
Motor ratings
A04 M2 Rated Voltage (printed on the nameplate of the motor) 80 V
A104 M3 Rated Voltage
P33 M1 Maximum Output Voltage Three-phase 200 V class series:
A53 M2 Maximum Output Voltage 200 (V)
A153 M3 Maximum Output Voltage Thee-phase 400 V class series:
400 (V)
F03 M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
A06 M2 Maximum Speed 1500 r/min
(Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
A106 M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
F07 Acceleration time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
is short, the inverter may not run the motor
F08 Deceleration time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s
P35 M1 Torque Boost 2.0 (For constant torque load)
A55 M2 Torque Boost (Note) In applications requiring a starting
A155 M3 Torque Boost 0.0 (Auto torque boost)
torque, adjust the torque boost (P35, A55,
A155) within the range from 2.0 to 20.0.)

3-101
 „ For motors except Fuji VG motor
Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design
values. The motor ratings are printed on the motor's nameplate. For your machinery design values, ask
system designers about them.
In applications requiring a starting torque, adjust the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) within the range
from 2.0 to 20.0, or perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2) and then set the torque boost (P31,
A55, A155) to 0.0 (auto torque boost).
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control
A01 M2 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM 0: Vector control for IM
A101 M3 Drive Control
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection Motor to be applied
(No modification is required for M2 or M3.)
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 0: No thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A05 M2 Rated Speed 1500 r/min
A105 M3 Rated Speed
Rated voltage of nominal applied
F05 M1 Rated Voltage
motors
A04 M2 Rated Voltage
80 V
A104 M3 Rated Voltage
Three-phase 200 V class series:
P33 M1 Maximum Output Voltage
200 (V)
A53 M2 Maximum Output Voltage
Thee-phase 400 V class series:
A153 M3 Maximum Output Voltage
Motor ratings 400 (V)
(printed on the nameplate of the motor) Capacity of nominal applied
P03 M1 Rated Capacity
motors
A02 M2 Rated Capacity
0.00 kW
A102 M3 Rated Capacity
Rated current of nominal applied
P04 M1 Rated Current
motors
A03 M2 Rated Current
0.01 A
A103 M3 Rated Current
P05 M1 Poles
A07 M2 Poles 4 poles
A107 M3 Poles
F03 M1 Maximum Speed
A06 M2 Maximum Speed Machinery design values 1500 r/min
A106 M3 Maximum Speed (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
values so that they are longer than your machinery
F07 Acceleration time 1 (Note) design values. If the specified time is short, the 5.00 s
inverter may not run the motor properly.
F08 Deceleration time 1 (Note) 5.00 s
P35 M1 Torque Boost
A55 M2 Torque Boost 2.0 (For constant torque load) 0.0 (Auto torque boost)
A155 M3 Torque Boost
P06 M1 %R1 Depends on the rated capacity.
A08 M2 %R1
To use the auto torque boost function (P35, 0.00%
A108 M3 %R1
A55, A155 = 0.0), be sure to perform motor
P07 M1 %X parameter auto-tuning (H01 =2). Depends on the rated capacity.
A09 M2 %X
0.00%
A109 M3 %X

3-102
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 2), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5 "H
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
H01 Tuning Selection 2: Auto-tuning (R1, Lσ) 0: Disable

Chap. 3
Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2) automatically changes the data of
function codes P06 and P07 for M1, A08 and A09 for M2, and A108 and A109 for M3. Be
careful with this data change.
After tuning, be sure to perform the full save function (H02 = 1) to save the tuned data into the

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

inverter.

3.5.4 Running the inverter for operation check

• If the user configures the function codes without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the
FRENIC-VG User's Manual, the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
• When making a test run with a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM), be sure to observe the test
run procedure given in Section 3.5.4.2. If wiring between the inverter and motor or PG wiring is wrong, or
the magnetic pole position offset is improper, the motor may run out of control.
An accident or injuries may result.

After completion of preparations for a test run as described above, start running the inverter for motor
operation check using the following procedure.

If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor, immediately stop operation and investigate the cause
referring to Chapter 13, "TROUBLESHOOTING."

3.5.4.1 Test run procedure for induction motor (IM)

(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference speed is 0 r/min and it is blinking on the LED
monitor.
(2) Set a low reference speed such as 100 r/min, using / keys. (Check that the speed is
blinking on the LED monitor.)
(3) To run the motor in the forward direction, press the key; to run it in the reverse direction, press
the key. (Check that the speed is lit on the LED monitor.)
(4) Press the key to stop the motor.

< Check points during a test run >

• Check that the motor is running in the forward direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check that the motor is running in the reverse direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
• Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the or key again to start driving the motor, then increase
the reference speed using / keys. Check the above points again.

3-103
3.5.4.2 Test run procedure for permanent magnet synchronous motor
(PMSM)
[ 1 ] Before proceeding with a test run
This section provides a test run procedure for the configuration consisting of the FRENIC-VG, the
interface card for PMPG drive (OPC-VG1-PMPG), and a PMSM using a UVW phase detection PG
(including GNF2 motor).
For a test run using a PMSM, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the equipment
for testing it by itself. If it is impossible to drive the motor by itself due to the equipment, however,
make a test run under the conditions that cause no problems even if the motor runs continuously in one
direction (forward or reverse).

[ 2 ] Preparation for a test run

(1) Before turning the inverter power ON, make checking given in Section 3.5.1 "Checking Prior to
Powering On."
(2) Check that wiring of the encoder (PG) is correct.
(For the connection diagram, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.1.2 "In combination with a dedicated
PMSM (GNF2 type).")

Wrong wiring may break the PG..

If the inverter is powered on with wrong wiring, disconnect the PG signal wires from the inverter, keep only
the PG powered on via the PGP and PGM, and then check that each signal is correctly output with an
oscilloscope or recorder.

(3) Turn the power ON, make a note of the current configuration of all function codes, and then
change the function code data as listed in Table 3.5-1.
(4) Check that the magnetic pole position offset (o10) is set to the previously specified value or
manually adjusted value.
Replacing the motor or encoder requires adjustment of the magnetic pole position offset again.
Table 3.5-1 Configuration for Test Run of PMSM

Current configuration before test run

Function
Name (Values given below are factory Configuration for test run
code
defaults)
F01 Speed 0 The current configuration 0 0: Enable the and keys on
Command N1 of function codes differs the keypad (Digital speed
depending upon the setting)
Operation equipment specifications. 0: Enable the , and keys
F02 0 0
Method Make a note of the on the keypad to run or stop the
current configuration and motor.
then change the function
F03 Maximum 1500 750 r/min Set about half of the current value
code data as shown at the
Speed M1 r/min (before test run).
right.
F40 Torque Limiter 0 3 3: Torque current limit
Mode 1 (Disable)
F44 Torque Limiter 150% 10% If motor power wires or encoder
Level 1 wires are wrongly connected, the
motor may run out of control,
breaking the equipment. To
suppress abrupt acceleration at the
time of runaway, decrease the
torque limiter level.
E45 Speed 00 01 Speed disagreement alarm: Enable
Disagreement (Disable) Power supply phase loss detection:
Alarm Disable
Note 1: If the moment of inertia of the coupled equipment is large, the motor may not run at a test run. If it happens,
adjust the torque limiter level 1 properly.
Note 2: After a test run, revert the function code data to the previous values.

3-104
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

[ 3 ] Test run
(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference speed is 0
r/min and it is blinking on the LED monitor.
(2) Set a low reference speed such as 100 r/min, using / Ｎ＊＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ
Ｎ ＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ
keys. (Check that the speed is blinking on the LED monitor.) ｆ＊ ＝××××．×Ｈｚ
(3) Set the maximum speed (F03) to 750 r/min. ＴＲＱ＝××××．×％

Chap. 3
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥ ＳＨＩＦT １
(4) Shift the LCD monitor to Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" to show the
speed (N*, N).
(5) To run the motor in the forward direction, press the key; to run it in the reverse direction, press

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

the key.
Check that:
• The speed on the LED monitor comes ON instead of blinking
• The motor accelerates up to the specified speed.
• There is no abnormal discrepancy between the reference speed (*N) and the detected speed (N)
shown on the LCD monitor.
(6) Press the key to stop the motor.
(7) If no alarm occurs or no problem is found in motor running, increase the speed with the /
keys.
(8) Turn the run command OFF.

< Check points during a test run >

• Check that the motor is running in the forward direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check that the motor is running in the reverse direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
• Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the or key again to start driving the motor, then increase
the reference speed using / keys. Check the above points during a test run.

[ 4 ] Troubleshooting for motor abnormality

If any of the following abnormalities is found during a test run, follow the troubleshooting procedure
in Table 3.5.-2.
• Turning the inverter ON triggers a p9 alarm.
• Entering a run command triggers a p9 or er9 alarm.
• Entering a run command does not run the motor or increase the speed.

Table 3.5-2 Troubleshooting for Motor Abnormality

Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures

(1) Setting of torque limiter level 1 Check the setting of the torque limiter level 1 (F44).
too small relative to the load. Î Increase the F44 data in increments of 5%.
(2) Wrong wiring between the Check the wiring between the inverter and motor.
inverter and motor. Î Correct the wiring.
(3) Wrong PG wiring. Check the wiring of the PG.
Î Correct the wiring.
(4) PMSM magnetic pole position Check the magnetic pole position.
not matched. Î Adjust the magnetic pole position (o10, A60, A160), referring to "„
Adjusting the magnetic pole position" in Section 3.5.3.3.

3-105
3.5.5 Selecting a speed command source
A speed command source is the keypad ( / keys) by factory default. This section provides the
speed command setting procedures using the speed command sources of the keypad, external
potentiometer, and speed selection terminal commands.

3.5.5.1 Setting up a speed command from the keypad

Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.

Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
F01 Speed Command Source N1 0: Keypad ( / keys) 0

• When the inverter is in Programming or Alarm mode, speed command setting with /
keys is disabled. To enable it, switch to Running mode.
• If any of higher priority speed command sources (multistep speed commands and speed
commands via communications link) is specified, the inverter may run at an unexpected
speed.

(2) Press the / key to display the current speed command on the LED monitor. The least
significant digit blinks.
(3) To change the speed command, press the / key again.
When you start specifying the speed command with the / key, the least significant digit on
the display blinks; that it, the cursor lies in the least significant digit. Holding down the /
key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry, while the cursor remains in
the least significant digit.
(4) To save the new setting into the inverter's memory, press the key.

For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."

3.5.5.2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer

Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
1: Analog voltage input to terminal [12]
F01 Speed Command Source N1 0
(0 to ±10 V)

(2) Connect an external potentiometer to terminals [11] through [13] of the inverter.
(3) Rotate the external potentiometer to apply voltage to terminal [12] for a speed command input.

For precautions in wiring, refer to Section 3.3 "Mounting and Wiring the Inverter."
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."

3-106
 3.5 Test Run Procedure

3.5.5.3 Setting up a speed command with multistep speed selection

Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code

Chap. 3
0, 1, 2, 3: Multistep speed 1 to 15
E01 to E14 Terminal [X1] to [X14] Functions 0
(0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8)
0 to 30000 r/min,
C05 to C19 Multistep speed 1 to 15 0.00 to 100.00%, or 0

PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

0.0 to 999.9 m/m

Terminals [X11] to [X14] are available only when an optional OPC-VG1-DIOA is mounted.
Assign signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 to four out of digital input terminals [X1] to [X14] by four
out of function codes E01 to E14 (data = 0, 1, 2 and 3). Specify multistep speed commands with
C05 to C19.
Turning digital signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 ON/OFF selectively switches the multistep speed
commands specified beforehand.

Combination of input signals

3 2 1 0 Selected speed command
SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multistep speed 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multistep speed 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multistep speed 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (Multistep speed 4)
Function codes
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (Multistep speed 5) C05 to C19
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multistep speed 6)
OFF ON ON ON C11 (Multistep speed 7) Data setting range:
0 to 30000 r/min
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multistep speed 8)
or
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multistep speed 9)
0.00 to 100.00%
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multistep speed 10)
or
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multistep speed 11)
0.0 to 999.9 m/m
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multistep speed 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multistep speed 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 N-14/CREP1
ON ON ON ON C19 N-15/CREP2

(2) Connect a multistep speed switch to an X terminal and [CM].

(3) Turn the multistep speed switch ON (short-circuit). The combination of those input signals
switches a multistep speed command.
For precautions in wiring, refer to Section 3.3 "Mounting and Wiring the Inverter."
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."
Enabling a multistep speed command with a multistep speed switch (ON between X terminal
and [CM]) disables the speed command source N1 specified by F01.

3-107
3.5.6 Selecting a run command source
A run command source is the keypad ( / / keys) by factory default.

3.5.6.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad

Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
F02 Operation Method 0: Keypad ( / / keys) 0: Keypad ( / / keys)

(2) Press the key to run the motor in the forward direction. Press the key to stop it.
(3) Press the key to run the motor in the reverse direction. Press the key to stop it.

For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."

3.5.6.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD]
and [REV])
Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
F02 Operation Method 1: External digital input signal 0: Keypad ( / / keys)

If terminal [FWD] and [REV] are ON, the F02 data cannot be changed. First turn those
terminals OFF and then change the F02 data.

(2) Connect the run forward switch between terminals [FWD] and [CM] and the run reverse switch
between [REV] and [CM].
Make sure that the SINK/SOURCE slide switch (SW1) is turned to the SINK position. If
SW1 is in the SOURCE position, the inverter cannot run the motor.

(3) Turn the run forward switch or run reverse switch ON (short-circuit) to run the motor in the
forward or reverse direction, respectively.
For precautions in wiring, refer to Section 3.3 "Mounting and Wiring the Inverter."
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."

3-108
 FRENIC- VG
4
Chapter 4
CONTROL AND OPERATION

This chapter provides the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It
also contains overview tables of function codes and details of function codes.

Contents

4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic ............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Operation Command ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Speed Command Selection Section..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Acceleration/deceleration Calculation, Speed Limiting, and Position Control Input Section............. 4-3
4.1.4 Motor Speed/Line Speed Detection .................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Pulse Train Command Input Section and Position Detection Section................................................. 4-5
4.1.6 Speed Control and Torque Command Section .................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.7 Torque Limit, Torque Current Command, and Magnetic-flux Command Section .............................. 4-7
4.1.8 Current Control and Vector Control Section ....................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.9 PID Calculation Section...................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.10 Load Adaptive Control Section ......................................................................................................... 4-10
4.1.11 Motor Temperature Detection Section .............................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.12 Function Selection Digital Input ....................................................................................................... 4-12
4.1.13 Function Selection Digital Output/Fault Output ............................................................................... 4-13
4.1.14 Function Selection Analog Input/Output........................................................................................... 4-14
4.1.15 Link Command Function Selection................................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.16 Enabling to Write to/Recording Function Codes............................................................................... 4-16
4.2 Function Code Tables................................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.2.1 Function Code Groups and Function Codes...................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code Tables.................................................... 4-18
4.2.3 Function Code Tables........................................................................................................................ 4-19
4.2.4 Data Format List ............................................................................................................................... 4-61
4.2.4.1 Data Type 0 to 13 ...................................................................................................................... 4-61
4.2.4.2 Data Type 12 to 145 .................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.3 Details of Function Codes......................................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.1 F codes (Fundamental Functions) ..................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.2 E codes (Extension Terminal Functions)......................................................................................... 4-120
4.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) ........................................................................................................... 4-193
4.3.4 P codes (Motor Parameter Functions) ............................................................................................. 4-199
4.3.5 H codes (High Performance Functions) .......................................................................................... 4-214
4.3.6 A codes (Alternative Motor Functions)........................................................................................... 4-264
4.3.7 o codes (Option Functions) ............................................................................................................. 4-267
4.3.8 L codes (Lift Functions) .................................................................................................................. 4-275
 4.1
LOCAL 4.1.1

6 HLD

communications
Enable
Enable 3-wire

24 LE
operation
STOP1 ,2, 3
54 STOP3
53 STOP2
52 STOP1
7 BX

link
Coast to a stop

Keypad
STOP
Monitor Operation method Link operation
I/O check F02 H30
REMOTE FWD Forward
Terminal command =1 =0,1 ON OFF AND Hold rotation
FWD command
=2,3 OFF ON
LOCAL Keypad FWD =0
Monitor
I/O check
COM (link) DX+ Integrated RS-485
S06 Commands are M13 Monitor
DX- 2 UPAC SW disconnected
Option cards (FWD) Monitor when turned on Keypad
1 simultaneously
Final run
OPC-VG1-TL command RUN/STOP
I/O check
OPC-VG1-SX I/O check
Operation Command

Fixed priority AND

Field bus M129 M14
Run command
(Via communi- Running status
cations link)

4-1
OPC-VG1-UPAC Forward rotation command from UPAC
OPC-VG1-SIU

Monitor Operation method

I/O check F02

REMOTE Reverse
REV
Terminal command =1 =0,1 ON OFF AND Hold rotation
REV command
Block Diagrams for Control Logic

=2,3 OFF ON
LOCAL Keypad =0
REV

COM (link) DX+ Integrated RS-485

S06 If you enter FWD and REV commands simultaneously, commands will be cancelled and the motor
DX- 2
will decelerate to stop.
Option cards (REV)
1 - If an X terminal does not assign the operation selection through link [LE], "ON" is assumed to it.
OPC-VG1-TL
OPC-VG1-SX Fixed priority - Commands related to link operation have the following priority.
Field bus Use function S06 for an operation command.
1. TL, SX, and field bus
2. Integrated RS-485
OPC-VG1-UPAC - Commands from the UPAC and SI option will be ANDed with other commands.
OPC-VG1-SIU Reverse rotation command from UPAC
States of all
switches indicate
factory setting.
4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic

CONTROL AND OPERATION Chap. 4

4.1.2 Speed Command Selection Section

Ready for jogging

10 JOG

KEYPAD
operation

Select speed
command N2/N1
11 N2/N1
Speed override Ai
13 N-OR ×
Auxiliary speed Ai
setting 1
1 AUX-N1
3 SS8
2 SS4
1 SS2
0 SS1
Select multistep
speed

24 LE
Enable
communications
link

Select speed
command N2/N1
11 N2/N1

4-2
 4.1.3

Starting Speed

15 CLR
Clear ACC/DEC to zero

28 LOCK
36 BPS
processor
27 SYC
21 IVS

Bypass ACC/DEC

Lock at zero speed

2 AUX-N2
30 N-LIM
Cancel speed limiter
Synchronous operation
inverse operation

(UP/DOWN control, Enable)

Auxiliary speed setting 2
optional function)
54 STOP3
Switch normal/

command (PG (PR)

Operation command Holding time Load
block diagram (See p.4-5.)
Compensating
Speed Control Internal speed

Ai
F24
Value =0,3,4,5 reference
Forward Reverse [LD-NLIM]
rotation rotation Speed
command command F23 ON Ⅶ
S-curve ＋ OFF OFF 0
acceleration/ ＋ ＋ ＋ Speed
(See p.4-2.) Ⅰ Ⅱ
deceleration Limiter
calculation ＋ =1,2,6
＋ OFF To ASR
×-1 7,8,9
(See p.4-6.)
UPAC speed ON ON (×-1)
auxiliary setting F76 Mode
0 r/min Monitor
Reference speed 2 F77 Level 1 Ⅳ
(before ACC/DEC M50 Speed Command N1 F01
calculation) F78 Level 2 Linear position control
Reference Speed Command N2 C25 Synchronizing command Monitor
Speed 2 Speed limit in (See p.4-5.)
PID calculation output M51
[PIDOUT] speed control
2 N-REF2 =2 Reference
Speed 3

4-3
PID Control
Monitor (Speed command selection)
H27
I/O check States of all
PARA 1, 2, 3, 4
Gain
Acceleration/deceleration switches indicate
Position Control Input Section

Decelerate at JOG
and S-curve switching H55 factory setting.
deceleration time 4 Position - Position
53 STOP2 Ⅸ detection control
∧ Position +
KEYPAD operation detection Hold
STOP (See p.4-5.)
Jogging operation OR circuit
10 JOG
Speed reference = 0%

ASR, ACC/DEC Zero Speed Control AND Lock at zero speed

4 RT1 time selection
28 LOCK
5 RT2
Acceleration/
deceleration
through link - Position control function has the following priorities.
(a) Linear position control (pulse train synchronized control, optional for OPC-VG1-PG)
S08 F07 C46 C56 C66 C35
COM (link) (b) Simplified position control (zero speed locking control)
S09 Over F08 C47 C57 C67 C36
writing - You can use both the KEYPAD panel and the [JOG] on the terminal box to switch to the jogging mode.
F69 C48 C58 C68 C37 - The displayed value for the speed control is the one before the acceleration/deceleration calculation.
OPC-VG1-UPAC
F70 C49 C59 C69 C38 - The COM (link) system is displayed as COM (link) .
OPC-VG1-SIU
Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/
Writing into S08 and S09 does not depend on H30 and [LE].
Acceleration time/ F67 deceleration 2 deceleration 3 deceleration 4 deceleration They always overwrite F07 and F08.
deceleration time JOG
UPAC F68 When you use the link, set [RT1] and [RT2] to enable "Acceleration/deceleration 1".
SW Acceleration/
deceleration 1
Acceleration/deceleration Calculation, Speed Limiting, and
4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic

CONTROL AND OPERATION Chap. 4

 TG MCA,OPC-VG1-FV Vector control for
H53="0" Line speed
induction machine with H53
Line TG
4.1.4
PG (Line speed control) Feedback selection
Detect line speed =1
Ai 11 LINE-N UPAC, SI
Line PG (Line speed input) Ao
Speed detection =2 Detected line speed

×
PG OPC-VG1-PG (LD) calculation

Monitor Digital line speed detection Monitor Monitor

PG (LD) o06 o07 Detection pulse correction 1 KEYPAD panel LED
I/O check =3 monitor
Input Pulse PG pulses o08 Detection pulse correction 2 5 LINE-N±
LD Detected line speed
M178 M107

Vector control for induction M1 M2 M3 Drive Control

machine with PG External PG Correction Factor P29 A51 A151 M1 M2 M3
Monitor Pulse Resolution P28 A30 A130 P01 A01 A101
States of all
I/O check switches indicate
12 M-CH2 factory setting.
SD Select motor 2,motor 3
13 M-CH3
PG Pulse Output Selection
Motor selection
E29 =0 =1 =2 =0 =1 =2 (See p.4-6.)
(M1, M2, M3)
Digital speedometer Pulse output (See p.4-7.)
="0"-"6" F79
FA Divider (See p.4-8.)
1500 FB circuit
Standard Speed detection

4-4
integration =0 =0 ≠2
5V and 12V PA Speed detection
complementary PG calculation
Ⅲ
Ao
output PB
Monitor Detected speed 1
=2 (Speed indicator,
5V line driver SD SPGT KEYPAD panel
PG OPC-VG1-SPGT prioritization prioritization LED monitor one-way deflection)
output Detected Speed
Motor Speed/Line Speed Detection

0 N-FB1+
17-bit M06
OPC-VG1-PG (SD) 1 N-FB1±
serial =1 Speed setting 1
OPC-VG1-SPGT =4 Detected speed 1
Vector control for sensor less Speed estimation
UPAC, SIU (Speed indicator,
FA+ induction machine calculation
(Speed setting 1) two-way deflection)
FA- Divider Simulated operation Torque
Pulse output UPAC (SW)
FB+ circuit mode reference value
FB- OFF - You can select a switch on the OPC-VG1-PG card to switch between motor speed
M1 M2 M3 Machine =2
model detection and line speed detection.
Dividing Ratio for FA, FB Pulse Output H51 H52 H127
calculation (a) PG (SD): Controls speed by detecting pulse train to calculate speed.
(Numerator) E109
Load inertia (b) PG (LD): Controls line speed by detecting digital line speed.
UPAC (simulated speed)
(Denominator) E110 ON
- The speed detection and speed estimation are invalid for V/f control.
" = 0～2 " - When you apply an analog frequency such as TG output as line speed, use FUJI's
Speed detection =3
OPC-VG1-PMPG FV converter board to convert it into voltage for Ai [LINE-N] input.
calculation
- The pulse output (divider circuit) is equal magnification output.
" = 6" Vector control for synchro-
OPC-VG1-SPGT
nized machine with PG
o09
 4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic

4.1.5 Pulse Train Command Input Section and Position Detection

Section

Chap. 4
CONTROL AND OPERATION

4-5
 4.1.6

command 2/1
Link
COM (link)

5 TB-REF
Torque bias level

communications link
Enable
Hold Ai torque bias

(Torque command)
Select PID torque bias
79 TB-PID
51 H-TB

24 LE
31 H41-CCL
Cancel H41
37 TB1
38 TB2
Select torque bias
DX+ Integrated RS-485 operation
DX- Option cards Fixed priority H30
OPC-VG1-TL Torque Command Source H41
2
OPC-VG1-SX =1,3 ON [PIDOUT]
Field bus 1 =5 Torque Bias
S02 PID calculation
output
=4 Ai F47 Torque Bias T1
Torque
=0,2 OFF bias hold F48 Torque Bias T2
=3
OPC-VG1-DIB
F49 Torque Bias T3
REMOTE =2
OPC-VG1-DIA 0%
Ai =1
6 T-REF ＋ -1
Torque current ＋
command [PIDOUT]
＋ ＋ F46
ASR； Speed control system F/F gain PID calculation
Select droop Droop Control output Mechanical Loss
control
Rotation
39 DROOP H28 Monitor direction Compensation
OPC-VG1-UPAC Speed setting 4 F50 Torque Bias
UPAC SW UPAC SW Torque Bias
Startup Timer

×
OPC-VG1-SIU ON M130

4-6
Speed ASR input filter
command - ＋ =0 OFF
＋ ＋ ＋ ＋ ＋
Ⅱ ASR ＋ ＋ Ⅴ
(See p.4-3.) OFF ＋ Torque
- UPAC, SIU
Reference speed 4 (ASR input) Proportional gain ON command
3 N-REF4 (Torque ON
M01 UPAC SW (See p.4-7.)
command 1)
Detected speed 2 (ASR input) Reference
4 N-FB2± OFF
Speed Speed 4
detection Monitor ASR Switching
Time UPAC, SIU
Ⅲ UPAC,SIU
(Reference
C70 (Torque bias)
(See p.4-4.)
KEYPAD ∧ ASR detection filter Speed 4)
panel H46 Observer
operation STOP - ASR (Automatic Speed Regulator) and S-curve
=1,2
acceleration/deceleration functions switch
OR Load disturbance/
10 JOG I- Feed Input Detection Observer simultaneously.
P-gain filter filter vibration suppressing
constant forward calculation - Torque control and torque current control hold the
Speed Control and Torque Command Section

Select ASR and ACC/ gain observer

4 RT1 DEC time C30 C31 C32 C33 ASR-JOG ASR output to zero.
F79 Motor Selection (M1, M2, M3) - The observer becomes ineffective when you set the
5 RT2 motor selection to M3 (V/f control).
F61 F62 F63 F64 F65 ASR1
C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 ASR2 =0 H47 H49 H51 M1

C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 ASR3 =1 H48 H50 H52 M2 States of all
switches indicate
C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 ASR4 =2 H125 H126 H127 M3 factory setting.
12 M-CH2 ASR Feedforward Gain Compensation Load
gain
I-time
Select motor 2, 3 H94 Magnification Setting inertia
13 M-CH3
 States of all
switches indicate
factory setting.
4.1.7

panel
- The COM (link) system is abbreviated as COM (link) . Note that it depends on H30

KEYPAD

operation
and [LE] as described in 4.2.6.

4 RT1
5 RT2

Ready for jogging

10 JOG

32 H42-CCL
Select ASR and
ACC/DEC time
(4 steps)
∧
Speed limiter STOP
Torque Limiter Level 1 Source F42 F43 Torque Limiter Level 2 Source under torque
Torque Current control
H42
Command Source
[PIDOUT] [PIDOUT] F76 Mode
PID calculation =5 PID calculation OR ASR
output output F77 Level 1 Output filter
COM (link) S10 =4 S11 COMS03
(link) S03 =4 Level 2
F78 C65 ASR4

REMOTE =3 DIB =3 C55 ASR3

DIB
REMOTE Speed
C60
OPC-VG1-DIA,DIB =2 Limiter C45 ASR2
=2 DIA DIA

[DIB] [DIA]
ASR4-P
Ai =1 F66 ASR1
3 TL-REF1 =1 4 TL-REF2 Monitor 7 IT-REF
Torque KEYPAD panel LED

Cancel H42 (Torque current command)

Torque Limiter Level 1 F44 =0 F45 Limiter monitor
Torque command C34 ASR-JOG
Command Section

Level 2
OFF display
OPC-VG1-UPAC UPAC torque limiter value 1 ON ON UPAC torque limiter value 2
M02 Torque command Notch Notch
OPC-VG1-SIU UPAC SW Torque Filter 1 Filter 2
UPAC SW Torque Command (Torque meter, two-
Command UPAC, SIU
Monitor way deflection) (Torque current H322 H325
Select torque limiter level 2/1 OFF ON 8 T-REF± command)
F51 Polarity H323 H326
35 TL2/TL1 9 T-REF+
selection H324 H327 (See p.4-8.)
UPAC, SIU

4-7
Torque Limiter Mode 1 ON Torque command ON
F40 (Torque Torque current
(Torque meter, one-
(See p.4-6.) command 2) =0 + command
Torque Limiter Mode 2 F41 way deflection)
Torque +
Ⅴ ÷ Ⅵ
limiter
Torque OFF OFF (M1motor)
UPAC, SIU UPAC SW ASR output
command (Torque filter
Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) command 2) UPAC SW UPAC, SIU
34 F40-CCL (Torque current
command)
Magnetic Flux Magnetic Flux F51 Polarity
H43
Magnetic-flux command Command Source Level at Light Load Torque Command
=3 F73 Monitor
COM (link) S04
UPAC, SIU
(Magnetic-flux Torque current command
Magnetic Flux Command Value H44 =2 (Torque ammeter, one-
command)
way deflection)
Ai ON (See p.4-8.) 6 IT-REF±
10 MF-REF =1
Magnetic-flux
Fixed filter reference 7 IT-REF+
φ Torque current command
=0
Ⅲ Ⅷ (Torque ammeter, two-
N way deflection)
Speed OFF
detection Pre-
UPAC SW Pre-excitation excitation
(See p.4-4.) (Initial level) F75
UPAC, SIU initial level Monitor Monitor
(Magnetic-flux KEYPAD panel LED KEYPAD panel LED
Pre-excitation monitor
command) F72 monitor
Mode Magnetic-flux Torque current
command display command display
Pre-excitation
(Duration) F74 M04 M03
33 H43-CCL Magnetic-flux Torque Current
Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) Command Command
Torque Limit, Torque Current Command, and Magnetic-flux
4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic

CONTROL AND OPERATION Chap. 4

 4.1.8

DC link bus voltage

13 V-DC
Coast to a stop
7 BX
Alarm relay output
30X
M1 Iron Loss Factor 1 P12
F37 Speed
M1 Iron Loss Factor 2 P13 Alarm
M1-ACR (P-gain) P26 P06 M1-%R1 Detection mode
F38 occurrence
L3/T
L2/S
L1/R

M1 Iron Loss Factor 3 P14 M1-ACR (I-time) P27 P07 M1-%X Zero speed
F39 control holding
Monitor time
Current KEYPAD panel Base
Ir* LED monitor OR
control section Voltage Sequence cutoff cutoff
decrease DC Link Bus Voltage
compensa- M21 Simulated operation
(See p.4-7.)
Φ* tion for P01
Torque Voltage
currentreference + + Vdc
+ + ACR Current detection
control + Vq reference
Ⅵ q axis Vector Vu Trapezoidal 6
- conversion wave conversion PWM
Magnetic- (torque) / 2/3
Vv
(See p.4-7.) output
fluxreference Id* d axis phase Vw On-delay
+ + (magnetic- conversion compensation
Ⅷ flux) Vd reference
Input power +
calculation + - + arrierg
k Φ* Voltage drop
compensa- Carrier frequency F26 enerato Main circuit
Input power tion r
× Monitor section
38 PWR-IN M1-%R1 P06
M1 Magnetic Exciting
Input power Saturation Factor
P15 to
Current Monitor Monitor
1 to 5 P19 M1-%X P07
(Motor output) Command U V W
Detected KEYPAD panel

4-8
12 PWR × × M1 Magnetic H112 to M147 Exciting LED monitor
Saturation Extension H118
Current Magnetic-flux Magnetic- Eq Induced Vq Vu
Coefficient 6 to 12 3/2 Voltage
Monitor Calculation flux voltage
(M1 only) M148 calculation
phase detection
M149 Ed calculation Vd conversi Vw
KEYPAD panel
LED monitor on/
Motor Output Iq Vector Iu
conversi Current
M10 P20 M1 Secondary Time Constant detection
Id on Iw
Speed
detection (See p.4-4.) Primary angular
Integra-
Ⅲ frequency ω1 reference tion θ*
M1 Slip Frequency (ω1) calculation
×
For driving P10 R2 Tempera-
Monitor correction ture Ｍ
Monitor Monitor For braking P11 calculation detection
F84 NTC
Input Watt- P24 M1 R2 Correction Factor 3
Current Control and Vector Control Section

Input Input Watt- Display 2+ 2 V2+V 2

Power hour Coefficient hour Data Iq Id thermistor
q d P22
for Input
M103 M115 Watt-hour M116 PG
Data P23
(See p.4-4.)
M1 R2 Correction Factor 1
- This block diagram is only for the vector control for an induction motor with a PG. The sensorless vector control M1 R2 Correction Factor 2 To motor
speeddetectionblock
uses induced voltage to estimate the speed. The synchronous motor driving does not include magnetic-flux diagram
Monitor Monitor Monitor
calculation.
KEYPAD panel KEYPAD panel KEYPAD panel
- The block diagram is simplified to show the state where the motor M1 is selected. Refer to the function code list to LED monitor LED monitor LED monitor
replace M1 with M2 or M3. Effective Output Effective Output Motor 16 TMP-M
Current Voltage Temperature
- The vector control converts from the fixed coordinate (U, V, W) to the rotation coordinate (d: magnetic-flux, q: Motor voltage
torque) in an instant and splits magnetic-flux and torque as in a DC machine to control torque. M11 M12 M22
11 V-AC
10 I-AC
Motor current
 4.1.9

setting
KEYPAD
panel speed
PID output value

∧
40 PID-OUT

Cancel PID
Cancel PID control

components
20 KP/PID
PID correction gain

Enable PID FF
69 PID-CCL
17 PID-G

70 PID-FF
component
∨ Ai Ao
PID output inverse FUNC
changeover DATA
48 PID-INV
PID Control OR
(Mode selection） H20
=2
PID Command 0% PID Control PID Control
PID Control F/F
Filter Time Upper limit
(Command selection) (Mode selection)
Constant
-1 0%
H21 H101 H25 H20
Internal speed 100% PID output
command ＋ value (%)
=0 ＋ ＋ =1,2
O PID × PIDOUT
PID reference value Ai - =3
- -1
16 PID-REF =1
PID Calculation Section

PID Control H26 ＋

H22 P-action =0
Lower limit 0%

4-9
PID feedback 1 Ai =OFF
15 PID-FB H23 I-action 100% 0%
=ON H24 D-action
PID feedback Ai
amount 2 Display coefficient A F52 Coeffi- Maximum value
27 PID-FB2 cient A
Display coefficient B F53
Switch PID
Coeffi- Minimum value
feedback signals
cient B
78 PID-1/2
0% 100%
Process amount

States of all - Setting H20 (PID control, action selection) to zero holds the PID calculation to zero.
switches indicate Monitor
factory setting. - [PIDOUT] of PID output is used for individual controls. See corresponding block diagrams for details.
KEYPAD panel LED
Speed command when H27 "PID control (speed command selection)" is set to 1.
PID Command Value (%)
Auxiliary speed command when H27 "PID control (speed command selection)" is set to 2.
M108
Torque command when H41 "Torque command selection" is set to 5.
PID Feedback Amount (%)
Torque limiting when F42 or F43 "Torque limiter value (level 1) or (level 2) selection" is set to 5. M109
PID Output (%)
M110
4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic

CONTROL AND OPERATION Chap. 4

 4.1.10

71
Load adaptive control

30
Definition 2
H61
Cancel speed limiter

speed limit calculation

Reset completion of
Load adaptive control Load Adaptive Control
=1 parameter switching Definition 1
-1 = 1, 2, 3 ON
N* 0 H201